JP2011143108A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve the monotonousness of a game and to suppress diminishment of amusingness of the game. <P>SOLUTION: The game machine is provided with a performance tool on which predetermined performances are displayed and a performance controller which controls performances displayed on the performance tool. When the internal lottery is won, it is so controlled that a performance which can provide a sense of expectancy for a bonus game to a game player is displayed on the performance tool. Besides, when the internal lottery is not won, such a performance is displayed on a display only with an extremely low probability. However, it is provided with an expectancy improver for increasing the probability with which a performance which can provide a sense of expectancy for a bonus game to the game player is displayed when predetermined conditions are met, even if the internal lottery is not won. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko gaming machine, a revolving type gaming machine, and the like.

  Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of symbol rows displaying a plurality of types of symbols are arranged side by side and an internal lottery is performed when a game is started by inserting a gaming medium (in a spinning-type gaming machine) For example, see Patent Document 1).

  In this type of gaming machine, when the result of the internal lottery is a win (bonus), a bonus game in which a large amount of game media can be given is performed.

JP 2002-315873 A

  However, in the above gaming machine, the player tends to continue monotonous games until the bonus is won. In this way, if a monotonous game is played until the bonus is won, the situation where the game does not shift to the bonus game often continues for a long time, and the interest may be reduced, and the player feels like playing a game with the game machine. May not occur. As a result, there is a risk of promoting the result of increasing the number of pedestals for the hall.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the monotonousness of a game and suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention for solving the above-described problems performs symbol display means in which a plurality of symbol rows each having a symbol attached thereto are arranged side by side, and performs a predetermined internal lottery for each game. Based on the fact that the internal lottery is won based on the lottery means, the symbol display that controls the display of the plurality of symbol strings in the variation state so that a specific symbol combination indicating that the internal lottery is won is displayed. A control means, an advantageous game executing means for executing an advantageous game in which a large amount of game media can be given to a player when the specific symbol combination is displayed based on winning of the internal lottery, and a predetermined effect An effect lottery that determines the effect displayed on the effect display means and the effect displayed on the effect display means from among a plurality of effect modes including a gorgeous effect that can give an expectation that the advantageous game will be executed Process When winning the internal lottery, the winning lottery means for performing the winning lottery process so as to be determined with the predetermined effect at a predetermined probability, and when the internal lottery is not won, The gorgeous effect or the similar effect only when the gorgeous effect or the similar effect is determined with a very low probability lower than the predetermined probability so that it is difficult to be determined to be a similar effect that is very similar to the effect. Based on the fact that the lottery effect lottery means for performing the lottery effect lottery so as to be determined, and the fact that it is determined to display the gorgeous effect or the similar effect on the effect display means, Despite the fact that the gorgeous effect or the similar effect is controlled to be displayed on the effect display means and the internal lottery, Based on the condition of is satisfied, the luxurious effect or the Gokuni effect is characterized in that it comprises the expected improvement means may enhance the frequency that appears.

  The gaming machine includes a symbol display means in which a plurality of symbol rows each having a symbol are arranged, and a lottery means for performing a predetermined internal lottery for each game, A symbol display control means for controlling display of a plurality of symbol strings in a variable state so that a specific symbol combination indicating that the internal lottery is won is displayed based on the winning of the internal lottery. ing.

  Here, “every game” means, for example, in this type of gaming machine, one game executed with a predetermined bet number set, and a predetermined number of medals and pachinko balls are inserted. In the slot machine, for example, in a three-slot slot machine, three games are included. There is a game that is played once by inserting a game medium, a game that is played by digesting credit data, and a game that is automatically set with a predetermined bet amount by winning a re-game player. included.

  The gaming machine further includes advantageous game execution means for executing an advantageous game that allows a player to be given a large amount of game media when a specific symbol combination is displayed based on winning of the internal lottery, and a predetermined effect. An effect lottery process for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including a luxurious effect capable of giving an expectation that an advantageous game is executed as the effect displayed on the effect display means and the effect display means Effect lottery means for performing, and effect display control means for controlling the gorgeous effect to be displayed on the effect display means.

  The effect lottery means is a winning lottery means for performing the effect lottery process at the time of winning so as to be determined as a luxury effect with a predetermined probability when the internal lottery is won, and when the internal lottery is not won, The gorgeous effect or the similar effect only when the gorgeous effect or the similar effect is determined with a very low probability lower than the predetermined probability so that it is difficult to determine a similar effect that is very similar to the gorgeous effect. , A lottery effect lottery means for performing a lottery effect lottery.

  Here, the extremely low probability is a probability set to be a big hit with a high probability of, for example, a quarter to a quarter, for example, when a gorgeous effect is displayed in relation to the predetermined probability. It is. For example, even if the expectation degree of jackpot when an effect with a low expectation degree of jackpot is displayed is about 1/100, the expectation degree of jackpot when a luxury effect is displayed is 1/4 to 1. The predetermined probability and the extremely low probability are set so as to be 1/5. In general, the probability of winning an internal lottery (winning a bonus) is extremely low, for example, about 1/300, and in many games, it is often lost.

  In other words, there are very few opportunities for the player to see the gorgeous performance (the performance performed when the bonus is won internally). Note that the “gorgeous effect or the similar effect” may be selected as the same effect when the result of the internal lottery is a win or when it is a loss. For example, when the result of the internal lottery is a win, the gorgeous effect can be determined, and when the result of the internal lottery is lost, the appearance looks gorgeous, but the gorgeous effect is fine. This is because it is possible to determine a very similar effect.

  The “gorgeous effect that can give a sense of expectation that an advantageous game will be executed” corresponds to, for example, an expected effect that causes a user to expect that a bonus may be won in an internal lottery. Expected effects include, for example, a story-based development effect in which the story develops one after another, an effect in which the equipment installed in the gaming machine operates flashy, or when the bonus is actually won in the internal lottery An effect that does not occur frequently in a normal game (normal game), such as an effect to be performed. In addition, the expected effect may be completed in one game or may be performed over a plurality of games.

  The effect display control means controls the effect determined in the effect lottery process to be displayed on the effect display means. For example, when it is decided to win the internal lottery and perform the luxury effect, Control is performed so that a gorgeous effect is displayed on the effect display means.

  The present invention further includes an expectation improvement means capable of increasing the frequency with which a gorgeous effect or a similar effect is displayed based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied even though the internal lottery is not won. Thereby, it can suppress that a monotonous game continues.

  As described above, the present invention can provide a gaming machine that can improve the monotony of a game and suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the slot machine from the front upper right. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door-shaped front member. (A) is a figure which shows the cross-sectional enlarged view of a connector part, (b) is a cross-sectional enlarged view which shows the state which moved the connector holder. It is the perspective view which looked at the game unit of the state which opened the front opening-and-closing member from the front upper right. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game unit from back upper right. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which decomposed | disassembled the connector from the connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which decomposed | disassembled the connector from the connector holder. It is the perspective view which looked at the connector holder from back lower left. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional enlarged view of a connector part. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional enlarged view which shows the state which moved the connector part. (A) is a perspective view which shows the connection holding state of a connector, (b) is a perspective view of the binding band used in that case. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional enlarged view which shows the connection holding state of a connector. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the front opening / closing member and the effect display apparatus from the front upper right. It is the expansion perspective view which looked at the front opening / closing member from the front upper right. It is the longitudinal cross-sectional view of the state which combined the front opening / closing member and the effect display apparatus, and the perspective view of a metal fitting. It is the perspective view which looked at the symbol fluctuation display device from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the symbol fluctuation display device from the back upper right. It is a disassembled perspective view of a symbol variation display apparatus. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the state which decomposed | disassembled the reel from the front upper right. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the state which disassembled the reel from front upper left. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lower half portion of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. It is a disassembled perspective view of FIG. It is the rear view which looked at the heat radiation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-section partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is the perspective view which looked at the power supply device from the front lower left. It is a principal part sectional drawing of the side plate of an outer main part, and a power supply device which shows another form. It is principal part sectional drawing of the door-type front member equipped with the transparent board. It is a disassembled / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain | linkage of a hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. (A) is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool to the vertical direction, (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view which shows the protrusion state of a coupling tool. It is a principal part crossing top view of the door-shaped front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. (A), (b) is a perspective view which shows the operating state of a coupling tool. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the principal part in a coupling tool. It is a disassembled perspective view of a coupling tool. It is the rear view which looked at the coupling tool from the back side. (A), (b) is the sectional view equivalent to the AA line of FIG. 48 which shows the operating state of a coupling tool. It is a block diagram of the main control board arranged at the game unit side and the main relay board arranged at the main body side. It is a block diagram of the main control board and peripheral control board which were arranged at the game unit. It is a block diagram of a peripheral control board arranged on the game unit side and a peripheral relay board arranged on the main body side. It is a front view of the main relay board | substrate and periphery relay board | substrate accommodated in a wiring relay member. It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of connectors CN1, CN4, CN5, CN6 and CN7 of the main relay board and each pin It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of connector CN3 of a main relay board | substrate, and each pin. It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by the number of pins of connector CN2 of a main relay board | substrate, and each pin. It is a figure which shows the number of pins of connector CN1 of a main control board, and the signal transmitted by each pin. Number of pins of connector CN3 of peripheral control board and signals transmitted by each pin, number of pins of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board and signals transmitted by each pin, and number of pins of connector CN2 and connector CN3 of peripheral relay board It is a figure which shows the signal transmitted by each pin. It is a rear view of the door-shaped front member of the slot machine. It is a perspective view of a door board storage case. It is a simple circuit diagram of a door decoration drive board. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the output sequence of serial data. It is the state which expand | deployed planarly the symbol row | line | column described on each reel belt | band | zone attached | subjected to each reel. It is the figure which shows the place which expanded the decorative member centering on the symbol display window. The combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine and its benefits are shown. It is a figure showing one basic processing procedure of one game in the slot machine. It is the figure which showed each process performed by a starting process concretely. It is a figure which shows the content of the reel stop process by a "table system". It is a flowchart which shows the content of the determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a BB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the BB game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the RB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the RB game completion | finish determination process. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation using the movable scissors thing 5903 in a normal game. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation using the movable scissors thing 5903 in a bonus game. It is a figure which shows production etc. until it transfers to a super-chance state. It is a figure which shows the game aspect of privilege production. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a game aspect of a privilege effect following FIG. 77. It is a figure which shows the game aspect of privilege production following FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer count process. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer effect determination process. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process. FIG. 83 is an N value determination table in the N value determination processing of FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect process.

  DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking as an example a slot machine which is a revolving game machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine as viewed from the front upper right, FIG. 3 is a longitudinal sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted, and FIG. ) Is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the connector portion, FIG. 4B is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a state in which the connector holder is moved, and FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the gaming unit with the front opening / closing member opened as seen from the front upper right. FIG. 6, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming unit, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the gaming unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIGS. 8A and 8B are main parts of the case member for explaining the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 10 is a front view in which the cover of the wiring relay member is omitted, and FIGS. 11 and 12 are exploded perspective views showing a state where the connector is disassembled from the connector holder. Figure 13 shows the connector holder FIG. 14 is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view of the connector portion, FIG. 15 is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view showing a state where the connector portion is moved, and FIG. 16A is a perspective view showing a connection holding state of the connector. FIG. 16B is a perspective view of the binding band used at that time, FIG. 17 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view showing the connector holding state, and FIG. 18 is an exploded view of the front opening / closing member and the effect display device. FIG. 19 is an enlarged perspective view of the front opening / closing member as seen from the front upper right, FIG. 20 is a longitudinal sectional view of the state in which the front opening / closing member and the effect display device are combined, and a perspective view of the metal fitting, FIG. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable symbol display device viewed from the upper right, FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the variable symbol display device, and FIG. Exploded perspective view seen from upper right 25 is an exploded perspective view of the reel in an exploded state viewed from the upper left front, FIG. 26 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, and FIG. 28 is a guide for the case member. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal discharge device omitted, and FIG. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the heatsink opening from the back side of the slot machine, FIG. 33 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, and FIG. 34 is a front view of the power supply device viewed from the lower left front. 35 is a perspective view, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the side plate of the outer main body and the power supply device, FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the door-shaped front member with a transparent plate, and FIG. Disassembled / assembled perspective view, FIG. 38 shows a hinge gold FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening, and FIG. 41 is the door-shaped front member. The perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part, Fig.42 (a) is a cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool longitudinally, FIG.42 (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view which shows the protrusion state of a coupling tool, FIG. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing another example of the hinge fitting, and FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present invention is attached to a box-shaped outer main body 100 having an open front surface, and to the front surface of the outer main body 100 so as to be rotatable in a laterally open door shape with a rotating shaft 100a. A vertically-long rectangular door-shaped front member 200, a symbol variation display device 300 that varies a plurality of symbols by a driving means, a case member 400 that is detachable from the outer main body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface, and an optional And an image display 500 that displays the image of the above. As shown in FIG. 18, the image display body 500 includes a front opening / closing member 501 made of resin and an effect display device 590 attached to the front side.

[Game unit]
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present invention includes a gaming unit 50 that is accommodated in an outer body 100 in a detachable and replaceable state. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the gaming unit 50 is detachably attached to the inside of the outer main body 100, and is provided on the front surface of the case member 400 and the case member 400 having at least a part of the front surface opened. The door-shaped front member 200 has a front opening / closing member 501 that is rotatable in the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200 and is supported so as to be freely movable between a closed position and an open position. Then, the symbol variation display device 300 is assembled to the upper part inside the case member 400, and the main control board 409 is mounted inside (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 6). An opening 516 that allows the variable display device 300 to be visually recognized is provided, and an effect display device 590 is mounted below the front opening 516 of the front opening / closing member 501 (in FIG. 6, the opening 591a of the decorative member 591) (see FIG. 6). 6), a peripheral control board 510 is mounted on the back surface of the front opening / closing member 501.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the gaming unit 50 includes a main control system in which game unit side wiring connected to the case side electrical components including the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590 is connected to the main control board 409. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control system wiring connector 425 attached to the main control system wiring 424 is divided into the wiring 424 and the peripheral control system wiring 426 connected to the peripheral control board 510. And a connector holder 428 that collectively supports the peripheral control system wiring connection connector 427 attached to the peripheral control system wiring 426.

[Outside body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the outer main body 100 has side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102, 102. It has a letter-shaped frame shape and is formed in a box shape in which only the front surface is opened by fixing a back plate 104 to the back of the frame. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a backward inclined state, and thus the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward inclined inclination. Further, a plurality of (four in the embodiment) penetrations are made in the area facing the upper rail (not shown) of the gaming machine installation island in a state where it is installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). Holes 132 are formed.

[Outer body-divider]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf-like partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a protruding portion 106 at the center as shown in FIG. 1, and vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends are attached to the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. , 102 is fixed to the inner surface, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a cylindrical projection (not shown) by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and positioned. In addition, an opening (not shown) for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in the innermost part on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space]
In a space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal discharge device 110 that discharges a medal as a game medium to a medal tray 201 (see FIG. 2) at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200, and a medal release A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing medals overflowing from the device 110, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Medal discharge device]
The medal releasing device 110 is obtained by attaching a hopper 110b for storing medals to a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a and is located in the hopper 110b. The medals are sent one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow rod 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the protruding end of the overflow rod 110d. The medal releasing mechanism of the medal releasing device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply]
As shown in FIGS. 30 to 34, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion where three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 and the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. The power supply device 112 is for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal discharge device 110 and is a component that easily generates heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 is provided with a heat radiating port at the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. 104a is established.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find unauthorized work on the power supply board 112s (see FIG. 34) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an interior of the slot machine 1. It is formed by a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 34) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a that faces the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b. One side of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided below the guard portion 102b. It has become a specification to sneak in. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is blocked by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 35 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed into a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly protruded toward the side plate 102 and the tip is fitted into the groove 102c. It comes to include.

  Thus, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is covered with the side plate 102 during use, The power supply board 112s and the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach a cover to the open surface after the power supply board 112s and the like are assembled in the device case 112a.

  The upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the apparatus case 112a are formed with a large number of air holes 112g, 112g. The device case 112a is lifted in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise and relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air at the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If an inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 34) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a Even if the height is shifted, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes an attachment piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 112 m and the heat radiating port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 are fixed to the outer main body 100.

  That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiating port 104a. Further, the protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is in a position inscribed in the heat radiating port 104a, and is a horizontal protruding piece inscribed in the upper side of the heat radiating port 104a to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. 112m-1 and a vertical projecting piece 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiating port 104a to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Accordingly, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat radiating port 104a. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted with respect to directions other than the direction of pulling forward by a simple operation of only fitting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of screw through holes 112p are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and are fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q in at least one of the through holes 112p. Thus, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction of pulling forward, the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a and the power cord is drawn out from the bulging portion. However, even if the power cord is bundled at this position, there is a high risk that the cord will be grounded. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and a power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for the case. Therefore, the slot machine 1 is moved on the manufacturing line or between lines. When moving the power cord, the power cord may slip on the ground or may get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of this example extends the cord outlet 104b from the upper side to the upper side and draws the power cord from there. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this example, since the power supply device 112 is set at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and only one wood screw 112q is screwed in, the installation is completed. Great labor saving in installation work. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw with respect to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112. In particular, a screw fixed to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize and may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra process and cost hardly occur. On the contrary, the cooling efficiency is improved because the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in this example, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally formed, so that it costs little. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Further, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as a heat generation countermeasure for the power supply device 112 can be implemented with almost no cost.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Upper space]
On the other hand, a case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as a core of the wiring means described later is attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. Further, a vent hole 133 for heat dissipation is formed on the back plate 104 above the wiring relay member 113.

[Door type front member]
2 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side on the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided in the approximate center on the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203, a 1-bet button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main control board 409, which will be described later, Similarly, a MAX bet button 206 for instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, 3) that can be used in one game, and a medal return button for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 to be described later to the medal tray 201. 208, a stored medal release button 209 for inputting a medal storage release command (release command by settlement) stored as data in the memory of the main control board 409, and a start lever for operating the symbol variation display device 300 210 and three reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are stopped. Lumpur stop button 211a, 211b, 211c and the like. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  In addition, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, and a medal basket 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return basket 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a well-known one that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown), and when the game state is waiting for the player to insert a medal, the flow path is set to the medal tub 212 side. In addition, in a gaming state in which medals are refused to be inserted, such as medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return basket 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position that covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the medal tub 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medal that passes through the medal bowl 212 reaches the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return basket 213 is connected to the front-side medal tray 201, and the medal that flows from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return basket 213 returns to the medal tray 201.

[Door-shaped front member-see-through window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and its upper half is a see-through window 214 for games covered with a transparent plate 214a. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590 in the image display body 500 can be seen side by side, and are integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The area of the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590 is visually divided into upper and lower parts by the forehead frame 216. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590, the arrangement of the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590 can be changed. Even if it is changed upside down, it can be used as it is.

[Door-shaped front member-transparent window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a is a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a methacrylic resin containing rubber excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IRD30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used). The edge members 214b and 214b bulge to the front side with the side facing the player as the front surface at the periphery of the three sides (left and right sides and upper side) excluding the bottom. , 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a mold for resin molding. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. Thus, even if it is large enough to cover both the symbol variation display device 300 and the effect display device 590, bending and distortion are unlikely to occur. The edge member 214b is a pair of members that are arranged with the left-right direction as the longitudinal direction at the upper end of the door-shaped front member 200, and a pair of members that are directed downward from both ends of the member (edge member 214b) arranged in the left-right direction. Member (edge member 214b). That is, the edge member 214b extending in the left-right direction straddles the pair of edge members 214b. Note that the edge member 214b extending in the left-right direction and the pair of edge members 214b are integrally formed, but may be formed of separate members.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that opens to the rear side (a solid structure that is not solid but has a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, for example, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or letters on the surface are incorporated in the internal space as necessary. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on any one side at a minimum.

  In FIG. 36, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitter 217a. The reflection members 217 b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right are set to have an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitter 217 a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitter 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. Further, the reflecting member 217 b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the upper side is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitter 217 a toward the upper side of the slot machine 1.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above-described structure can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit is made, and can produce an effect that appeals to the surroundings of the occurrence of the big win. In this way, by performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won a big hit, and the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further increases the game. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot is coming out.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the bottom of the plate shape from the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200 with respect to the concave groove 219 (see FIG. 1) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Inserted diagonally and fitted into a joinery type, with the transparent plate 214a standing upright in this state to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200, and from the back of the door-shaped front member 200 It fixes with the screw | thread 603 (refer FIG. 1) which let it pass. FIG. 36 is a cut view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 36, if the player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign material to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[Door-type front member-locking device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200.

[Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 21, the symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, for example, three reels 301 a, 301 b, 301 c (hereinafter referred to as each reel 301) that can be individually rotated, A device case 302 that incorporates and accommodates reels 301 is provided, and a game is played with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surface of each reel 301.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the device case 302 includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, a right side plate 306, a left side plate 307, and a partially arcuate rear plate 308 that covers the rear surface. It is an enclosed box shape, and a part of the arc of each reel 301 protrudes from the front of the device case 302. In addition, as for the device case 302, only the bottom part board 304 is formed with the metal plate, and the other part is formed with resin.

  Mounting ears 306a and 307a projecting outward in the left and right directions are formed at the front upper end portions of the right side plate 306 and the left side plate 307, respectively, and screws (not shown) are inserted through substantially the center of the mounting ears 306a and 307a. Through-holes 306b and 307b (see FIG. 21) that can be made are penetrated in the front-rear direction. Although not shown, the bottom plate 304 is provided with a plurality of (for example, three) hanging pieces bent in the vertical direction in the left-right direction, and penetrates these hanging pieces in the front-rear direction. A through hole is formed. Then, the mounting ears 306 a and 307 a are fixed to the reinforcing member 407 (see FIG. 6) provided at the upper front end of the case member 400 with screws, and the drooping piece is laterally located above the center of the case member 400. The symbol variation display device 300 is attached to the case member 400 by being fixed to the reinforcing bar 402 provided with screws. As shown in FIG. 23, a plurality of screw holes 302a into which screws 313a and 313b for fixing each reel 301 are screwed are formed at a predetermined interval on the front edge of the device case 302. The lower screw 313b is a normal male screw, but a tapping screw is used for the upper screw 313a because the object to be screwed is a resin molded product.

  A cover body 309 is assembled on the front side of the device case 302. The cover body 309 is constructed between a frame-shaped frame portion 310 formed along the front edge of the device case 302 and the upper and lower ends of the frame portion 310, and each reel 301 incorporated in the device case 302 is attached to the cover body 309. It is comprised from the partition part 311 arrange | positioned at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction so that it may partition. In addition, the front surface of the partition part 311 is formed in a substantially arc shape so that the center part in the vertical direction protrudes most toward the player side. That is, the gaps between the reels 301 are closed from the front, and are formed in an arc shape so as to be continuous with the circumferential surface of each reel 301. In addition, the partition part 311 arranged on both the left and right sides is integrally formed with a shielding part 311a that shields the mechanisms in the both-side reels 301a and 301c from the left and right outer sides. In addition, mounting holes 312 through which screws 313a and 313b can be inserted are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the partition part 311 in the frame part 310.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 23, a reel main relay board 315 and a backlight relay board 318 covered with a board case 314 are arranged on the left side plate 307 of the apparatus case 302, and the reel main relay board is arranged. Each reel 301 is individually driven and controlled by the drive signal relayed by 315. The reel main relay board 315 is provided with two connectors 316a and 316c protruding through the opening of the board case 314, and the backlight relay board 318 is provided with two connectors 316b and 316d protruding through the opening of the board case 314. It has been.

  In the reel main relay board 315, a signal for driving and controlling each reel 301 and a motor power supply are relayed and inputted via a connector 316a protruding from the lower left side of the board case 314, and each reel The detection signal sent from the photosensor 325 accommodated in 301 is relayed to the main control board 409. The connector 316c protruding from the bottom surface of the substrate case 314 has a connector-attached harness (connector 317 protruding from the rear plate 308 of the device case 302) provided on the reel motor relay substrate 326 (described later). (Not shown) are coupled to each other so that a drive signal and motor power can be supplied to the reel motor 321 accommodated in each reel 301 and a detection signal can be received from the photosensor 325.

  In the backlight relay board 318, a connector (not shown) is connected to a connector 316b protruding from the upper surface of the board case 314 through a through hole 308a connected to a backlight 322 described later and formed in the rear plate 308. Not) is connected. In other words, the power source for operation is applied to the backlight 322 via the connector 316b. The operating power is supplied to the backlight relay board 318 via a connector 316d provided at the center of the left side surface of the board case 314.

  The harness with a connector includes one or a plurality of electric wires having different covering colors for each reel 301, and each backlight housed in each reel 301. Connected to 322 is an electric wire of the same color as the color of the electric wire included in the harness with a connector. That is, the color of the harness and the electric wire is set to be different for each reel 301. According to this, it is possible to perform color matching between a harness including an electric wire that supplies electric power to the reel motor 321 and an electric wire that receives a detection signal from the photosensor 325, and an electric wire that supplies electric power to the backlight 322. In addition, it becomes easy to collate the electric wire with each reel 301 (that is, check whether there is a miswiring), and it is possible to check the arrangement position of each reel 301 based on the color of the electric wire. That is, in the assembly process of the slot machine 1, the arrangement order of the left, middle, and right reels 301 is an extremely important item that should not be mistaken. It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the process has been performed correctly, and the quality of the slot machine 1 can be ensured.

  Further, a U-shaped slit 333 that penetrates the left side plate 307 is formed above the substrate case 314 in the left side plate 307, and the electric wire connected to the connector 316b is connected to the left side using a binding band (not shown). It is possible to bind together with the plate 307. In particular, since the latching portion 333a having only the lower end connected by the roll-shaped U-shaped slit 333 opened at the lower side is integrally formed with the left side plate 307, the latching portion 333a is bent in a state where a part of the binding band is bent. If it is inserted above, it becomes possible to hook the binding band to the latching portion 333a very easily. That is, in order to hook the binding band to the left side plate 307, in the case where two holes are drilled in the left side plate 307, the tip of the binding band must be inserted through the two holes in order, Although the bundling work may be difficult, if the U-shaped slit 333 is provided, the electric wire can be hooked from the upper side of the hooking portion 333a, and workability is improved. In addition, it is conceivable to form the hook so as to protrude outward from the left side plate 307, but this is not preferable because the configuration becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost such as the mold cost becomes high.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, in the apparatus case 302, each reel 301, a reel motor 321 that rotatably supports each reel 301 and applies a rotational force, and a right side of each reel 301 are arranged. A motor mounting plate 320 that fixes the reel motor 321 and a motor mounting plate 320 that is fixedly mounted on the motor mounting plate 320 and that is arranged along the inner surface of each reel 301, particularly along the player side. A substantially arc-shaped backlight 322 that emits light to the side is provided.

  More specifically, the reel motor 321 is a DC step motor that can rotate forward and backward, and a flange 323 is fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 321a. The flange 323 is a substantially disk-like member, and a fitting part 323a notched in a radial direction is formed on a part of the circumferential surface, and a protrusion 323b provided with a male screw part on the circumferential surface. Is formed. Correspondingly, the reel 301a has the right side surface (the back side surface in FIG. 25) generally open, but the left side surface (the front side surface in FIG. 25) has a substantially cross-shaped side surface. A member 330 is provided, and a flange 323 of the reel motor 321 can be attached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25, the central portion of the side member 330 has a through hole 330a through which the protrusion 323b of the flange 323 is inserted, and a circular accommodation portion 330b that can accommodate the flange 323 inside. In particular, as shown in FIG. 24, the circular accommodating portion 330b has an anti-rotation protrusion 330c that protrudes toward the inside of the reel 301 and that can be fitted to the fitting portion 323a of the flange 323. Is formed. A lock screw 324 is screwed into a protrusion 323b that passes through the through-hole 330a and protrudes outward from the circular housing portion 330b, whereby the flange 323 of the reel motor 321 is fixed to the side member 330 of the reel 301a. Installed in condition. That is, the rotation shaft 321 a of the reel motor 321 is directly connected to the side member 330 of the reel 301. Since each reel 301 is fixed on the shaft center by a lock screw 324, a force in the diametrical direction does not act, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation shaft 321a from shaking.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the motor mounting plate 320 is formed of a metal plate and includes a motor mounting portion 320a for mounting the reel motor 321 and a light mounting portion 320b for mounting the backlight 322. Yes. A mounting piece 320c bent in the vertical direction is formed on the front side (player side) of the upper and lower ends of the motor mounting plate 320, and penetrates in the front-rear direction substantially at the center of the mounting piece 320c. A through hole 320d is formed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 23, these through-holes 320d are provided at positions that match the mounting holes 312 formed in the cover body 309 and the screw holes 302a formed in the device case 302 in the front-rear direction. . That is, from the front of the cover body 309, the screws 313 a and 313 b are screwed into the screw holes 302 a of the apparatus case 302 through the mounting holes 312 of the cover body 309 and the through holes 320 d of the motor mounting plate 320. On the other hand, the motor mounting plate 320 and the cover body 309 are assembled in a fixed state. That is, the cover body 309 and the motor mounting plate 320 are fastened to the device case 302 together. For this reason, compared with what fixes the cover body 309 and the motor attachment plate 320 separately with respect to the apparatus case 302, while reducing a work process, three members, ie, the cover body 309, the motor attachment plate 320, and an apparatus. The mutual positioning in the case 302 can be performed accurately and easily. As a result, the clearance of the cover body 309 with respect to each reel 301 can be reduced, and the gap between the reels 301 can be closed with high accuracy. In other words, the internal structure of the device case 302 can be made more difficult to see, and deterioration in appearance can be suppressed.

  In addition, an extended lower portion 320e extending rearward is formed on the lower rear end side of the motor mounting plate 320, and the reel motor relay is provided at a corner portion formed by the extended lower portion 320e and the motor mounting portion 320a. A substrate 326 is attached. The reel motor relay board 326 includes an electric wire (not shown) connected to the reel motor 321, an electric wire (not shown) connected to the photo sensor 325, and a harness with a connector (not shown) connected to the reel main relay board 315. And a connector 317 (see FIG. 22) and the like are mounted. An extension upper part 320g extending in the same direction as the extension lower part 320e is formed on the upper rear end side of the motor mounting plate 320. The extension upper part 320g is connected to the backlight 322. A groove (not shown) for guiding an electric wire (not shown) and an electric wire presser 327 for preventing the electric wire wired in the groove from deviating from the groove are attached. The wire retainer 327 is made of a transparent and elastically deformable thin plate-like resin member, and one end thereof is fixed by a screw 327a.

  In this way, by holding the electric wire in an appropriate position by the cooperation of the groove portion and the electric wire presser 327, the floating state of the electric wire can be prevented without providing a substrate such as the reel motor relay substrate 326. It can be avoided that the electric wire becomes an obstacle and the rotation of each reel 301 is braked or the electric wire is caught during the rotation. A bundling member 328 that holds the electric wires connected to the reel motor 321 and the electric wires connected to the backlight 322 in a state of being collected is attached to the motor attachment plate 320 in front of the electric wire presser 327.

  An attachment piece 320f having an L-shaped cross section is erected on the rear end side of the motor attachment plate 320 toward each reel 301 to support the photosensor 325. The photosensor 325 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit that face each other, and outputs a signal according to whether light emitted from the light emitting unit reaches the light receiving unit. As shown in FIG. 24, a light shielding piece 331 that passes between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit in the photosensor 325 is provided on the inner surface side of the side member 330 in each reel 301 each time the reel 301 rotates once. Projects inward. That is, every time the reel 301 is rotated once, the light emitted from the light emitting unit is shielded and a signal corresponding to the light is output.

  By the way, since the light shielding piece 331 blocks light emitted from the light emitting portion, it is preferably formed of an opaque member, for example, a black member. On the other hand, the side member 330 of the reel 301a is integrated with the reel 301a. Therefore, it is preferably formed from a light transmissive member such as a transparent member. For this reason, the light shielding piece 331 and the side member 330 cannot be integrally formed, and means for attaching the light shielding piece 331 to the side member 330 is required. However, in the case of attaching via a fastening member such as a screw, the degree of the center of gravity of the entire reel 301 including the light shielding piece 331 being eccentric from the rotation axis is high, and there is a possibility that the rotational speed of the reel 301a may be uneven. In addition, when the light shielding piece 331 is bonded with an adhesive, it is difficult to position the light shielding piece 331 with respect to the side member 330, and thus the rotational position of each reel 301 may not be accurately detected.

  Therefore, in this example, the light shielding piece 331 is formed by insert molding. That is, the light-shielding piece 331 and the side member 330 are integrally formed by placing a previously formed light-shielding piece 331 in a mold and injection-molding the reel 301a and the side member 330. According to this, it can be formed relatively easily and the positioning accuracy of the light shielding piece 331 with respect to the side member 330 can be increased.

  The backlight 322 has a substantially arc-shaped appearance, and three LEDs 322a arranged at predetermined intervals are provided on the side of the motor mounting plate 320 that contacts the light mounting portion 320b toward the side member 330 side. It is arranged to emit light. In addition, on the inner surface side of each reel 301, a white reflecting portion 322 b that reflects light emitted from each LED 322 a toward the symbol row (not shown) of the reel 301 is formed. For this reason, it is possible to emit light on the inner side of the reel 301a, and it is possible to illuminate the symbols located on the player side, particularly the three symbols, with substantially uniform light.

[Case material]
The case member 400 has a size that substantially matches the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the case member 400 is erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403. A box having an opening 401 on the front surface. The rear plate 405 is erected on the rear edge of the bottom plate 403, and the top plate 406 covers the upper surface of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404. It is.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plate 404, 404 and the inner surface of the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are made of metal reinforcement. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 across the opening 401 is stretched between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. Then, the area below the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area of the effect display device 590, the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area of the symbol variation display apparatus 300, and the image display body An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind 500 is assigned as a wiring work space 408, and a main control board 409, which is a main control board, is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board other than the control board 409 (for example, a peripheral control board 510 described later) is also arranged in the wiring work space 408. Here, the main control board 409 controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the operation unit 202 or the like. In addition, the peripheral control board 510 performs predetermined effect control according to the progress of the game.

  The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443 and 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, each of which has through holes 132, 132... (See FIG. 1) of the outer main body 100. It exists in the area | region including the intersection with the axis line which passes, and it is opened sufficiently widely than this through-hole 132,132 .... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight portion 443 is close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through-hole 132 can be found by searching with the peripheral edge of the skylight 443 as a reference, so that the position of the through-hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator cannot look into the skylight 443. Note that by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 project from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the boss holes 114 are pre-processed on the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 114 (see FIG. 1). The bosses 410 and 410 are provided near the wiring window 411 described later, while the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer main body 100 side are provided near the wiring relay member 113, thereby the case member 400. Positioning of the wiring relay member 113 between the wiring window 411 and the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 7, and the concave step portion 412 is formed on the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 (see FIG. 1). Fit together. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end on the rear plate 405 side of the recessed step portion 412, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The concave step 412 can be smoothly fitted. As described above, the case member 400 is guided straight to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid on the plate 105 or press-molded integrally. On the other hand, a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 29, a convex rail member 116 is laid on or integrally formed with the partition plate 105, and on the other hand, flanges 415 and 415 are formed at both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by stoppers 117, 117, 117 in the form of swinging levers shown in FIGS. 1 and 26 in a state where the case member 400 is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIG. 1, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end portion of the partition plate 105 and the two fixtures 118, 118 suspended from the top plate 103, and the case member 400 is shown by a solid line in FIG. 26 is manually switched between an operating posture that engages with a part thereof and a non-operating posture that does not engage with the case member 400 as shown in an imaginary line in FIG. 26 to restrict the forward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105. . In addition, if the stopper 117 is formed in a key shape as shown in FIG. 27 and is engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. Can do.

  Moreover, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing a side plate 404 of the case member 400 and a locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the top plate 406, and the case member 400 is fixed to a predetermined position. Switching between the operating posture and the non-operating posture can be performed from the inside of the case member 400 in a state of being pushed into the position.

[Image display]
The effect display device 590 in the image display body 500 is a panel-type unit capable of displaying an image, which is composed of at least a liquid crystal display (in addition, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like). It is attached to the front side of a front opening / closing member 501 (see FIG. 18) that closes the front opening so as to be opened and closed. As shown in FIG. 18, the front opening / closing member 501 is a part in which a region 2/3 from the lower side accommodates the effect display device 590, and a region 1/3 from the upper side is arranged in front of the symbol variation display device 300. It has become a part. That is, on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501, a housing portion 515 having a peripheral wall 515a formed therein is provided, and the effect display device 590 is housed in a region 2/3 from the lower side, and 1 / The decorative member 591 is accommodated in the third area. The front opening / closing member 501 and the decoration member 591 are formed with openings 516 and 591a for visually recognizing the symbol variation display device 300 arranged in the case member 400 from the front of the game unit 50, respectively. A gaming state display board 450 having various LEDs for displaying a gaming state (the number of bets, the number of credits, an error, etc.) related to the slot machine 1 on the right side of the opening 516 on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501. Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 18, a substrate case unit 551 that accommodates a peripheral control substrate 510, a small substrate case 554, and the like are assembled on the rear surface side of the front opening / closing member 501. The substrate case unit 551 is made of a transparent resin member, covers the bottom surface side of the peripheral control substrate 510 (that is, the surface on the front opening / closing member 501 side), covers the upper surface side of the peripheral control substrate 510, and covers the substrate case. The substrate case upper part 553 is detachably attached to the lower part 552. Therefore, when the front opening / closing member 501 is opened, the substrate case unit 551 that accommodates the peripheral control board 510 appears so as to jump out of the case member 400, so that the workability with respect to the peripheral control board 510 can be significantly improved. . In addition, the effect display device 590 and the peripheral control board 510 can be integrally configured, and the handling is facilitated, and the complexity of the wiring work space 408 in the case member 400 can be suppressed.

  However, as described above, when the effect display device 590 is arranged on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501 and the substrate case unit 551 is arranged on the back side of the front opening / closing member 501, the back side of the effect display device 590 is Since it is covered with the front opening / closing member 501, it may be difficult to ground as a noise countermeasure for the effect display device 590, or the appearance may be reduced by a ground wire or the like.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a horizontally-long rectangular opening 520 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the housing 515 of the front opening / closing member 501 in which the effect display device 590 is housed. In addition, a conductive metal fitting 522 having a substantially U-shaped cross section is provided so as to straddle the front and back surfaces of the front opening / closing member 501 through the opening 520. The metal fitting 522 is made of an elastic metal piece, and the front portion 523 located on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501 is in contact with the metal plate 521 (shield plate) on the back surface of the effect display device 590. A rear portion 525 located on the back side of 501 is connected to the ground wire 527. That is, the metal plate 521 on the back surface of the effect display device 590 is electrically grounded via the ground wire 527 and the metal fitting 522, and noise intrusion to the effect display device 590 is suppressed. Yes. Thus, since the effect display device 590 attached to the front side of the front opening / closing member 501 is connected to the ground wire 527 on the back side of the front opening / closing member 501, the effect display device 590 is attached to the front opening / closing member 501. The ground wire 527 can be connected later, and the ground wire 527 is wired between the front opening / closing member 501 and the peripheral control board 510 (board case unit 551). Can be suppressed.

  Further, the front opening / closing member 501 is provided with a screw hole 529 that allows the male screw 530 to be screwed therein. When the male screw 530 is screwed from behind the front opening / closing member 501, the front opening / closing member 501 protrudes from the front surface. Further, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 is pressed from the back side by the tip portion of the male screw 530. That is, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 is elastically deformed by the propulsive force of the male screw 530 and biased toward the metal plate 521 on the back surface of the effect display device 590. For this reason, after attaching the effect display device 590 to the front surface side of the front opening / closing member 501, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 can be brought into pressure contact with the metal plate 521 of the effect display device 590 only by screwing the male screw 530. As a result, the metal fitting 522 and the metal plate 521 can be reliably brought into contact with each other.

  Further, the rear portion 525 of the metal fitting 522 is provided with a through hole 526 through which the male screw 530 can be inserted, and when the male screw 530 is screwed into the screw hole 529 of the front opening / closing member 501 through the through hole 526. The metal fitting 522 is fixed to the front opening / closing member 501. In other words, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 can be elastically deformed toward the metal plate 521 of the effect display device 590 using the male screw 530 for fixing the metal fitting 522 to the front opening / closing member 501. By using the male screw 530 in this way, the configuration is simplified and the number of work steps is reduced, so that the cost can be reduced.

  A Y-shaped terminal 528 is crimped to the tip of the ground wire 527, and the ground wire 527 is connected to the rear portion 525 of the metal fitting 522 by attaching the Y-shaped terminal 528 to the metal fitting 522. In particular, in this example, when the male screw 530 is screwed into the screw hole 529 of the front opening / closing member 501 through the through hole 526 of the rear portion 525, it is screwed with the Y-shaped terminal 528 sandwiched between the rear portion 525 and the male screw 530. It is. That is, by screwing one male screw 530, the Y-terminal 528 can be fixed in addition to the attachment of the metal fitting 522 and the elastic deformation of the front side portion 523. For this reason, the entire configuration is further simplified and the number of work steps can be further reduced.

  The metal fitting 522 has a concave receiving portion 524 formed on the back surface of the front portion 523. When the male screw 530 is screwed into the front opening / closing member 501, the tip of the male screw 530 contacts the receiving portion 524. It comes to touch. For this reason, when the male screw 530 is screwed in, the front portion 523 of the metal fitting 522 can be prevented from escaping from the propulsion direction (axial direction) of the male screw 530, and the front portion 523 is reliably pressed toward the effect display device 590. Is possible. Note that the receiving portion 524 of the front portion 523 may be formed in a convex shape, and a concave recess may be provided at the tip of the male screw 530. Even with this configuration, the front portion 523 can effectively escape. Can be prevented.

  Further, the U-shaped metal fitting 522 is fixed in a state in which the open portion is directed downward and is hooked on the lower edge of the opening 520. For this reason, when attaching the metal fitting 522 to the front opening / closing member 501, it is possible to hold the metal fitting 522 in a hooked state without supporting the metal fitting 522 by hand. Therefore, for example, it is possible to work with one hand. In particular, when the metal fitting 522 is hooked to the lower edge of the opening 520, the mounting through hole 526 formed in the metal fitting 522 and the screw hole 529 formed in the front opening / closing member 501 overlap each other. Since it is set, the alignment between the through hole 526 and the screw hole 529 can be performed very easily, and workability can be improved.

  Further, a concave / convex surface 550 is formed on the rear surface side of the front opening / closing member 501, and the metal fitting 522 is disposed in a lower portion of the concave / convex surface 550, that is, a portion that does not protrude rearward. For this reason, it can prevent that the assembly | attachment of the board | substrate case unit 551 becomes difficult by the head part of the metal fitting 522 or the external thread 530. FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, since the peripheral control board 510 is accommodated in a non-conductive board case unit 551 formed of synthetic resin or the like, the metal fitting 522 protrudes to the back side of the front opening / closing member 501. Even if arranged in such a state, contact between the metal fitting 522 and the peripheral control board 510 can be prevented, and an electrical failure can be suppressed.

[Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. FIG. In addition, since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 includes a fixing member 420a that is attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a rotating member 420b that is attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line region 500s in FIG. 37), the rotating member 420b and the fixing member. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e with a pin P1, and the short link is connected to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is formed on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f with a pin P3, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. In addition, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  In this way, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-bar rotation chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is formed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C, both the lever mechanisms are designed to approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centering on the rotation axis 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200. Each pin position is set. That is, the hinge bracket 420 corresponds to a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are not rotated. The distance from the edge side is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h that overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is expanded in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), And pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis and inserted into a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the lever mechanism and locking the image display body. It is for fixing 500 to an open position.

[Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a lock piece 421 is provided on the reinforcing member 407 (right side in FIG. 6) on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 among the vertical reinforcing members 407 of the case member 400. When the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 6, the tip of the lock piece 421 engages with the receiving portion 508 protruding from the back side of the image display body 500, and in this state, the image display is performed. The body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the lock piece 421 is rotatable about the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[Image display body-connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the case member 400 is operated. In this case, the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side must be opened first, and then the image display body 500 on the far side must be opened, which may reduce workability and annoyance. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the front opening / closing member 501 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 is rotated around the door-shaped front member 200, and not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation. That is, in the slot machine 1 of this example, the effect display device 590 is mounted below the front opening 516 (the opening 591a of the decorative member 591 in FIG. 6) where the symbols attached to the reels 301a to 301c face. (See FIG. 6), in the slot machine having such a configuration, if the gaming unit 50 is attached to the door-shaped front member 200 side, the weight on the door-shaped front member 200 side increases, and the outer main body 100 has a larger weight. It is necessary to make the hinge for pivotally supporting the door-shaped front member 200 strong, and the design load increases. Therefore, the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby reducing the design load and the inside of the game unit 50 (for example, wiring of the main control board 409, for example). Etc.) can be visually recognized to facilitate maintenance and prevent fraud.

  Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment are configured such that the pivot locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge fitting 420. However, there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the connector 700 of the embodiment is formed with a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and is slidable inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is housed in such a state that the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by a stop shaft 703. . In this way, as shown in FIG. 40, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it is an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connector 700 enters and exits the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative shift in movement.

  Note that the maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when it is opened 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and the increase in size of the coupler can be suppressed.

  Further, the stop shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. ing. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved up against the urging force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving up and floating the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  41, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is disposed inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is engaged with the hooking wall 702b at the end of the groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. The rod 702 is provided with a knob 706 projecting on the side surface in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction. The stopper 704 can be unlocked by picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It has become. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the front end side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701 a is in contact with the hooking wall 702 b when the rod 702 protrudes the most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 41, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 that traverses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 6, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part (not shown) that is inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging part 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. Is not provided). Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500. Yes.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described telescopic rod-type connector 700 but also a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while being opened at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, thereby impairing smoothness. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to constantly urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 is closed by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge fitting 420, which is one element for rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the double lever mechanism as described above. A simple one that rotates the image display 500 may be used.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above, in which the image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, since the important parts (for example, the main control board 409 and the peripheral control board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, it is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. There is.

[Front Opening / Closing Member-Lighting Device]
As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the decorative member 591 accommodated on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501, a plurality of lighting devices 502a that emit light downward are arranged below the lighting device 502a. A reflecting member 502b that reflects light emitted from the lighting device 502a toward the player side is disposed. In particular, the reflecting member 502b has a white reflecting surface that is curved so that the lower side is closer to the decorative member 591 on the front surface, and the substantially entire region of the decorative member 591 is irradiated with light substantially evenly. Note that the decoration member 591 is made of a light-transmitting member, and the light reflected by the reflection member 502b is radiated to the outside (player side) through the decoration member 591. That is, the decorative member 591 can be surface-emitted by the lighting device 502a and the reflecting member 502b.

[Wiring means]
For example, the bet buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter simply referred to as “main body” in the operation unit 202 of the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer main body 100. Side electrical component ") and the main control board 409, etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as" case member side electrical component "as a general term for electrical components on the case member side). Connected. The slot machine 1 according to the embodiment displays the symbol variation display device 300 and an arbitrary image on the game unit 50 (the case member 400 and the front opening / closing member 501 that are detachably provided to the inside of the outer main body 100). The case-side electrical component including the image display body 500 is assembled. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main body is detachable from the outer main body 100. Reasonable wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the side electrical component and the case member side electrical component.

[Wiring means-Wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 9 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. As shown in FIG. 3, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400, and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. As shown in FIG. 9, the wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the game unit side wirings 423 (see FIG. 11) connected to the case member side electric parts. In addition, the mounting plate 120 screwed to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (embodiment) to be accommodated between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120 Then, it is composed of two main and small connector boards (hereinafter also referred to as “connector connection terminal boards”), that is, a main relay board 122 and a peripheral relay board 123.

  Of the two connector boards 122, 123, the main relay board 122, which is the larger connector board located on the left side in FIGS. 9 and 10, is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the control board 409 is provided. That is, by connecting the connector 425 to the connector 124, the operation power is supplied to the main control board 409, and the main control board 409 controls the main body side electrical components arranged outside the case member 400. A signal can be transmitted.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board (peripheral relay board) 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 9 and 10 is attached to the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed playable state. Therefore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 10, it can move in the vertical direction and can also move in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with a connector 427 at the tip of a harness 426 connected to a peripheral control board 510 described later. Furthermore, in the present invention, the game unit side wirings are divided into main control system wirings 424 connected to the game control board and peripheral control system wirings 426 connected to the peripheral control board (see FIG. 11). The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used.

  Further, it is mounted in a non-fixed playable state in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. Therefore, it can be moved in the vertical direction as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. Can move. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with a connector 427 (see FIG. 11) at the tip of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main control board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used. That is, by connecting the connector 427 to the connector 125, from the peripheral control board 510 to the door decoration drive board 860 (described later), the L speaker 201a, and the R speaker 201b (described later) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Drive signals are sent and can be operated.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 projecting at a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half portion. It has a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward and a main body side guide portion 453 described later.

  The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 and is distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 side of the outer main body 100 (see FIG. 1), and the side plates 102 and 102 and the back plate 104 are connected to each other. The direction is changed almost vertically in the vicinity of the corner, and many of them are connected to the main body side electrical components through wiring openings (not shown) provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electrical component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, it remains as it is regardless of the wiring opening of the partition plate 105. Connected.

[Wiring means-connectors 425, 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 are connected to the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main control board 409 of the case member 400 and the peripheral control board 510. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 are connected to each other.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 having a through hole 430 at the substantially center and projecting on both sides of the holder main body 429, and the attachment. A well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) attached to the through-hole 430 of the attachment piece 431 and a unit-side guide portion 452 to be described later are provided. As shown in FIG. An attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 cannot be disconnected.

[Wiring Relay Board-Connector 425, 427-Temporary Stop Shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of the installation with the game unit 50 alone. Meanwhile, the connectors 425 and 427 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that is directed from the inside of the case member 400 toward the wiring window 411 (see FIG. 7), and is almost mounted with the connector holder 428. It has a horizontal bench 433, bench side plates 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other two on the upper and lower sides, there is an interval at which the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a force in the X direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the bent state.

  Then, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is fitted between the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434, thereby connecting the connector. The holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418. Of course, even if it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tips of the harnesses 424 and 425 hit the parts in the case member 400, and of course, the parts There is no danger of damaging itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 4 (b) → FIG. 4 (a), in the wiring process after the case member 400 is fixed to the outer main body 100, one of the bench side plates 434 is warped outward as described above. When the holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 comes into contact with the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector 124 of the wiring relay member 113. , 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in this state to lock the attachment piece 431 to the support cylinder 128.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a support base, and is separated from the case member 400 and does not come into contact. Even if the main body 100 and the game unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

  From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped. That is, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment has a box shape in which a front surface is open and a back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other main body side electrical components, and the outer main body. A display unit for changing a plurality of symbols on a detachable case member, a game unit provided with other case member side electrical components, body side wiring connected to the body side electrical components, and case member side electrical A wiring relay member attached to a back plate of the outer main body to relay case side wiring connected to a component, a connector attached to a tip of the case side wiring, a connector holder attached to the connector, and the connector A temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the holder; and fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member. Then, the connector holder is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing member before the gaming unit is attached to the outer body, and the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means while the gaming unit is attached to the outer main body. The connector of the holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the slot machine 1 described above, the mounting of the gaming unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, a connector is directly connected to the gaming unit 50. A method of automatically connecting the connectors by attaching and pushing the gaming unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, in this method, when the gaming unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a large burden is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a concern about reliability, and there is a problem that costs for the countermeasures are high. is there.

  The slot machine 1 has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the gaming unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the game unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game strikes the upper door-shaped front member, there is a possibility that the connector coupling becomes unstable because a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion. There is a problem that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the gaming unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is connected to a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer main body 100 and is separated from the gaming unit 50. Even when using low-cost general connectors that are used by soldering to the board, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and games. Further, since only the gaming unit 50 is a replacement target when changing the model, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not a replacement target, the burden on the game room for changing the model is also reduced.

[Combination of connectors 425 and 427 and connectors 124 and 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a difficult problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be coupled together. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for enhancing flexibility at the time of connection without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of this example, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 serving as the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively attached, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction that is non-fixedly placed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “orthogonal” is not strictly 90 degrees). , Meaning that it is about 90 degrees on social belief)). In such a configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is corrected. Since it moves to correct, connector 427 and connector 125 can also be coupled. Thus, a board-fixed and inexpensive DIN standard connector can be sufficiently used.

  From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped. That is, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment includes one or more connector groups in a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector. Is attached to one connector holder, and another connector group that is paired with the connector holder is mounted on the connector board, and the connector board is further divided into connectors, and one of them is fixed to the board support member and the other connector. The board is attached to the board support member so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the connector coupling direction.

  In addition, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment has a box shape in which a front surface is open and a back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other main body side electrical components, and the outer main body. A display unit for changing a plurality of symbols on a detachable case member, a game unit provided with other case member side electrical components, body side wiring connected to the body side electrical components, and case member side electrical A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay case side wiring connected to the component, two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring, and the two or more connectors A connector holder that collectively supports the connector group, a fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and each connector of the two or more connector groups Connected to another connector group using a board-fixed type connector that is fixed to a printed circuit board and attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate, and to which the connector of the other connector group is fixed And connecting the connector connecting terminal board to the wiring relay member while fixing one of the connector connecting terminal boards to the wiring relay member. It is characterized in that it is attached in such a manner that it can be freely moved in a direction orthogonal to the direction.

  In addition, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment includes one or more connector groups in a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector. Is attached to the board support member via the connector board, and another connector group that is paired with the board support member is attached to one connector holder, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder and the other The connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the connector coupling direction.

  In addition, the gaming machine (slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment has a box shape in which a front surface is open and a back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other main body side electrical components, and the outer main body. A display unit for changing a plurality of symbols on a detachable case member, a game unit provided with other case member side electrical components, body side wiring connected to the body side electrical components, and case member side electrical A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay case side wiring connected to the component, two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring, and the two or more connectors A connector holder that collectively supports the connector group, a fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and each connector of the two or more connector groups Connected to another connector group using a board-fixed type connector that is fixed to a printed circuit board and attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate, and to which the connector of the other connector group is fixed A terminal board for fixing, and fixing one connector in the connector group to the connector holder, and attaching the other connector to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. It is characterized by that.

  In the above gaming machine (slot machine 1), if the connector holder is operated while aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, the relative position between the other connectors is slightly deviated due to manufacturing error or the like. Even if there is, the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error. Accordingly, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. In addition, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard soldered to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member, and by extension, the wiring relay member, by fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the gaming unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the gaming unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. . For this reason, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the gaming unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the gaming unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are used as a reference for coupling is compared to the opposite configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. Further, in this example, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for the coupling aim can be easily matched.

  Further, a chamfered portion (either a straight chamfer or a curved chamfer) is formed at the peripheral corner of the tip of the convex connector 425, 427 and / or the peripheral corner of the insertion port of the concave connectors 124, 125. In addition, the inductive action along the taper of the chamfered portion makes the connectors more connectable.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be movable. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a with a female thread is provided on the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 469a are formed on both sides of the connector 427, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. A loose hole 469a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted to the ear piece 427b with a screw 469 with a washer. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the diameter difference between the free hole 469a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 integrally. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  In this example, a mechanism for guiding the insertion direction of the connector holder 428 is provided in order to further facilitate the connecting operation between the connector 124 and the connector 425 and between the connector 125 and the connector 427. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 4B and 9, a resin cover body 121 is provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 so as to cover the connector substrate 122 and the connector substrate 123. As described above, the cover body 121 is formed with a main body side guide portion 453 that protrudes toward the connector holder 428 side. The main body side guide portion 453 is disposed below the opening 126, and has a projecting portion 462 that has a quadrangular prism-like appearance on its side, and a slit-like main body side through hole 461 that penetrates in the vertical direction at the center portion in the left-right direction. It consists of and. The main body side guide portion 453 may be formed and bonded separately from the cover body 121, but is integrally formed with the cover body 121 in this example.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 4B and 13, a unit side guide portion 452 is formed on the bottom surface of the connector holder 428 so as to face the main body side guide portion 453. The unit side guide portion 452 includes a hole forming member 464 having a hole 463 into which the protruding portion 462 of the main body side guide 453 can be inserted. That is, the connectors 124 and 125 on the outer main body 100 side (wiring relay member 113 side) are cooperated with the main body side guide portion 453 formed in the cover body 121 and the unit side guide portion 452 provided in the connector holder 428. The connection work between the connector 425 and 427 (hereinafter referred to as the unit-side connector 425) assembled to the connector holder 428 is further facilitated. That is, the fitting direction of the unit side connector 425 and the like is guided with respect to the main body side connector 124 and the like fixed to the wiring relay member 113. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 are opposed to each other, the distance m between the opening portion of the hole portion 463 and the protruding portion 462 in the hole portion forming member 464. Is shorter than the distance n between the unit-side connector 425 and the like and the body-side connector 124 and the like, and the tip of the protruding portion 462 is inserted into the hole portion 463 and relatively slides along the peripheral surface of the hole portion 463. In the middle of the operation, when the unit side connector 425 and the body side connector 124 come into contact with each other, and the tip of the protruding portion 462 is inserted to the back side of the hole 463 as shown in FIG. Are connected to the main body side connector 124 and the like. Therefore, it becomes possible to connect smoothly and easily, and workability | operativity can be improved significantly. Even when the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 and the like are completely connected, the protruding portion 462 does not reach the innermost wall of the hole portion 463. For this reason, even if a manufacturing error occurs in the length of the protruding portion 462 or the depth of the hole portion 463, the unit-side connector 425 and the body-side connector 124 can be reliably connected. In addition, since the unit-side guide portion 452 is formed in the connector holder 428, the fitting of a plurality of unit-side connectors 425 and the like can be collectively guided by one unit-side guide portion 452.

  By the way, in the case of guiding the fitting direction of the unit-side connector 425 and the like by the protruding portion 462 formed in the cover body 121 and the hole portion 463 formed in the connector holder 428, at least the tip of the protruding portion 462 is at the main body side. It protrudes forward from the connecting portion between the connector 124 and the unit side connector 425. For this reason, in the case where the protruding portion 462 is disposed above the connector 124, the connecting portion between the connector 124 and the connector 425 is partially blocked by the protruding portion 462. For example, the connection between the connector 124 and the connector 425 is There is a risk that a foreign object may not be noticed. Moreover, it may be difficult to visually recognize the connection state between the connectors. On the other hand, in this example, since the block-shaped hole forming member 464 for forming the hole 463 is disposed on the bottom surface of the connector holder 428, the connector 124 and the connector 425 are formed by the protruding portion 462 or the hole forming member 464. It is possible to prevent the connected portion from being shielded, and to easily check the connected state visually.

  By the way, in the case where the main body side connector 124 and the unit side connector 425 and the like are connected in a state where they can be separated from each other, the connector 124 and the connector 425 or the connector 125 and the connector 427 are separated from each other. There is a possibility that an unauthorized control means or an unauthorized part is attached to the game, that is, a game based on an unauthorized signal may be performed. In order to solve this problem, after the unit side connector 425 or the like is connected to the main body side connector 124 or the like, the unit side connector 425 or the like and the main body side connector 124 or the like may be fixed in an inseparable state. However, according to this, it becomes extremely difficult to remove the gaming unit 50, and there is no advantage that the gaming unit 50 can be replaced.

  Therefore, in this example, after the gaming unit 50 is accommodated in the outer main body 100 and the unit side connector 425 and the like are connected to the main body side connector 124 and the like, as shown in FIG. The unit side guide portion 452 and the main body side guide portion 453 are bundled so that the connected state between the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 and the like is maintained. In particular, the binding band 454 is formed of a trace generating member, and when the connection state between the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 is released (that is, another illegal member is connected to the unit side connector 425 and the like). When it is possible to do so, a trace is left.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, at least one of the unit side guide portion 452 and the connector holder 428 is provided with a unit side through hole 460, and the main body side guide portion 453 has a unit side when connected. Since the main body side through hole 461 that can be superimposed on the side through hole 460 is provided, by binding the binding band 454 through the unit side through hole 460 and the main body side through hole 461, On the other hand, the unit side guide portion 452 can be fixed, and the connected state between the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 and the like is maintained. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), the binding band 454 includes a band portion 455 provided with serrated row teeth on one side, and an insertion through which the band portion 455 can be inserted provided on one end side of the band portion 455. A head 456 having a hole, and a locking claw 457 that is formed inside an insertion hole in the head 456 and that can lock the serrated row teeth of the band portion 455 and cannot be released after locking. And a logo display portion 458 formed on the extension of the band portion 455 and engraved with a logo. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 17, the band portion 455 of the binding band 454 is passed through the unit side through hole 460 and the main body side through hole 461, and then the band portion 455 is inserted through the head portion 456. When inserted into the hole, the sawtooth row teeth formed on one side of the band portion 455 are locked by the locking claws 457 formed inside the insertion hole, and the main body side guide portion 453 and the unit side guide portion 452 are engaged. Are united.

  As the band portion 455 is inserted deeper into the insertion hole, the annular portion (binding portion) is contracted, and the tightening force is increased. In particular, the locking claw 457 is configured such that once the sawtooth row teeth are locked, the subsequent release operation cannot be performed, so that the connection state between the unit side connector 425 and the body side connector 124 and the like is maintained. And fraud can be prevented. Further, when the binding band 454 is cut, the unit side connector 425 and the like can be removed from the main body side connector 124 and the like, but in this case, there remains a trace that the binding band 454 has been cut. Thus, it is possible to grasp whether or not an illegal act has been performed. Note that when the old game unit is removed from the game store, it is only necessary to cut the binding band 454 with a scissors or the like, so that the burden on the operator at the time of replacement can be reduced.

  Note that the binding band 454 of this example is engraved with a specific logo on the logo display portion 458. Therefore, even if the binding band 454 is restored to its original state using another binding band after an illegal act is performed, Since the types of binding bands are different, it is possible to grasp that an illegal act has been performed. Further, since the binding band 454 is made of a fluorescent member, it can be made more conspicuous than other members disposed in the case member 400, and the unit side connector 425 and the body side connector 124 can be connected to each other. It becomes possible to clearly recognize whether or not the state is released. Further, since the case member 400 is formed of a transparent member, the state of the binding band 454 can be visually recognized from the outside of the case member 400 even when the front surface of the case member 400 is closed by the image display body 500. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the unit side through-hole 460 communicates with the notch-shaped groove 460 a formed on the rear end side of the hole forming member 464, and the groove 460 a and is formed in the connector holder 428. Through hole 460b. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 14, when the main body side guide portion 453 having the main body side through hole 461 is inserted into the hole portion forming member 464, the through hole 460b and the groove portion 460a and the main body side through hole 461 are inserted. It is possible to insert the binding band 454 in the vertical direction and tighten the binding band 454 along the outer peripheral surface of the hole forming member 464. In particular, not only the connector holder 428 but also the rear end side of the hole forming member 464 is formed with a notch-shaped groove 460a through which the binding band 454 passes, so that the hole forming member 464 is connected to the back side of the connector 425 ( Even when it is formed on the connection part side), the insertion position of the binding band 454 can be brought closer to the front side (operator side), and workability can be improved. Even when the hole forming member 464 has a relatively large thickness, the groove portion 460a formed in the hole forming member 464 has a shape in which the rear end is opened, and thus the binding band 454 with respect to the hole forming member 464 is formed. Can be inserted easily.

  Further, since the horizontal width dimension of the groove portion 460a formed in the hole forming member 464 is substantially equal to the horizontal width of the binding band 454, movement of the binding band 454 inserted into the groove portion 460a, in particular, lateral movement is prevented. can do. That is, since the binding band 454 is positioned by the hole forming member 464, the binding band 454 can be stably bound at an appropriate position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, on the upper surface side of the connector holder 428, an entry guide portion 465 inclined downward toward the unit side through hole 460 (especially the through hole 460b) is formed, and the binding band 454 is attached. When doing so, the approach direction of the binding band 454 is guided from the front side of the connector holder 428 toward the through hole 460b. For this reason, even when the through-hole 460b is formed on the back side of the connector holder 428, the tip of the binding band 454 can reach the through-hole 460b relatively easily, and the workability can be further improved. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, a delivery guide portion 466 is formed on the bottom surface and the front surface of the hole forming member 464, and the tip of the binding band 454 after inserting the unit side through hole 460 is formed as a hole portion. Guided toward the front of member 464. For this reason, it is possible to send out naturally toward the front and arrange it in an annular shape so as to surround the hole forming member 464 without performing an operation such as drawing out the binding band 454 inserted through the through hole 460b. Become. Therefore, it is possible to perform the bundling work more easily. The delivery guide portion 466 includes a substantially arc-shaped guide surface 467 and a bank portion 468 formed along the guide surface 467. For this reason, the binding band 454 can be smoothly fed out along the substantially arc-shaped guide surface 467.

  The harness 424 (see FIG. 11) connected to the unit-side connector 425 and the like is wired substantially parallel to the direction in which the unit-side through hole 460 is drilled. Specifically, the harness 424 is drawn out upward, which is perpendicular to the mounting direction of the unit-side connector 425 and the like. For this reason, it is possible to avoid the binding band 454 inserted into the unit side through hole 460 and the harness 424 from crossing each other, and it is possible to prevent the binding work by the binding band 454 from becoming difficult due to the presence of the harness 424.

  By the way, even if the unit side guide part 452 and the main body side guide part 453 are held in a state of being matched by the binding band 454, the unit side connector 425 and the like with respect to the connector holder 428 in which the unit side guide part 452 is formed. Is detachably attached, the unit side connector 425 and the like can be detached from the main body side connector 124 and the like without cutting the binding band 454.

  On the other hand, according to this example, as shown in FIG. 11, a plurality of unit-side connectors 425 and the like are attached to the connector holder 428 by screws 469. These screws 469 are attached as shown in FIG. Since the connector holder 428 is screwed into the surface facing the main body side connector 124 and the like, the screw 469 cannot be loosened unless the main body side connector 124 and the unit side connector 425 are separated. Therefore, it is prevented that “the unit side connector 425 and the like are removed from the main body side connector 124 and the like while the unit side guide portion 452 is fixed to the main body side guide portion 453”.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, in the outer main body 100, the cover body 121 formed with the main body side guide portion 453 covers the connector board 122 and the like. It cannot be removed from the outer body 100. Therefore, the crime prevention effect can be further enhanced. In particular, the cover body 121 is attached to the connector board 122 or the like using screws (not shown), but the screws are screwed through through holes 134a formed at positions facing the connector holder 428. Therefore, unless the main body side connector 124 and the unit side connector 425 and the like are separated, the screws cannot be loosened. In other words, in a state where the unit side connector 425 and the like are connected to the main body side connector 124 and the like, a tool such as a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the portion into which the screw is screwed. Therefore, it is prevented that “the cover body 121 is removed from the connector substrate 122 or the like while the fixed state of the unit side guide part 452 with respect to the main body side guide part 453 is maintained”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the shelf-like temporary fixing shelf 418 is formed in the case member 400 of the gaming unit 50 as described above, but the bench portion 433 and the bench side plate in the temporary fixing shelf 418. 434 limits the movable range of the connector holder 428. For this reason, when connecting the unit side connector 425 and the like to the main body side connector 124 and the like, first, the connector holder 428 is roughly positioned by the bench portion 433 and the bench side plate 434, and then the main body side guide portion 453 and the unit side Positioning with high accuracy is performed by the guide portion 452. Therefore, even if the main body side guide portion 453 and the unit side guide portion 452 are disposed at positions where it is difficult to visually recognize them, it is possible to easily match them, and thus smoothly guide the fitting direction of the unit side connector 425 and the like. It becomes possible to do.

  The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a finished product state in which the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the game hall, but when the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail (not shown) of the game machine installation island are fixed with a fixing member such as a wood screw, The door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and a wood screw (not shown) is inserted through the skylight 443 from the inside of the case member 400 into the through-hole 132 of the outer main body 100, and further with a tool such as a screwdriver. The fixing member is tightened through the skylight portion 443, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper rail (not shown) vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper rail can be selected. In addition, when replacing the entire gaming machine, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed, it is possible to prevent an adverse effect (so-called fool hole formation) in which the hole of the fixing member is opened at the same position of the upper rail.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 3, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used as a cooling fan (not shown) for the image display body 500. Then, it passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent hole 133 (see FIG. 1) of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range. It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

  Subsequently, another example of the coupler will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. 45 is a perspective view showing the operating state of the connector 80, FIG. 46 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the main part of the connector 80, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the connector 80, and FIG. FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the line AA in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, the connector 80 is disposed in a state where most of the coupler 80 is embedded in a groove-like housing portion 500 b formed on the back surface of the image display body 500. That is, it is provided in a state where it does not protrude so much from the back surface of the image display body 500. In addition, the connecting tool 80 has a rotating outer edge of the image display body 500 so that the case member 400 cannot be operated in a state where the case member 400 is mounted in the outer main body 100 and the opening of the case member 400 is closed by the image display body 500. It is provided in the part. For this reason, it is necessary to connect the connecting tool 80 to the stop shaft 703 with the image display body 500 opened, and thus connecting the connecting tool 80 without forgetting to release the lock piece 421, that is, a door-shaped front member. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the 200 and the image display body 500 cannot be opened.

  Similarly to the connector 700, the connector 80 protrudes from the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500, and a resin connection rod 800 whose tip side is rotatably connected to the stop shaft 703, and the connection rod 800, The image display body 500 includes a sliding guide member 801 that is slidably supported along the radial direction of the rotation locus. That is, by supporting the connecting rod 800 so as to be able to protrude and retract in the protruding direction, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the rotation outer edge side of the image display body 500 as the door-shaped front member 200 rotates. Even if the distance to the change, the connection state can be maintained by sliding the connection rod 800.

  In the connecting tool 80 of this example, an extendable arm 820 is interposed between the image display body 500 and the connecting rod 800. The telescopic arm 820 is configured to bendable in the radial direction of the rotation trajectory, and when the telescopic arm 820 extends, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b) and 49 (b), the connecting rod 800 extends in the protruding direction. On the other hand, when the telescopic arm 820 contracts, as shown in FIG. 45 (a) or FIG. 49 (a), the connecting rod 800 is immersed.

  Next, the configuration of the connecting rod 800, the sliding guide member 801, and the telescopic arm 820 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 47, the connecting rod 800 has a substantially rod-like shape as a whole, a circular shaft hole portion 800d is formed on the base portion 800a side, and a long hole whose longitudinal direction has a long diameter is formed on the distal end side. A shaft hole 800c having a shape is formed. The height of the upper surface is the same between the base portion 800a side and the distal end side, but the thickness in the height direction is about ½ from the base portion 800a side to the substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. Yes. In other words, by forming a space below the base portion 800a, it is possible to crawl a part of the telescopic arm 820. As a result, when the telescopic arm 820 is bent, the telescopic arm 820 and the base portion 800a partially overlap. Even if it exists, the thickness in the height direction does not become too large. In particular, a semicircular cutout portion 800e is formed on the side surface of the base portion 800a (the lower surface in FIG. 49B), and a connecting portion formed on the distal end side of the second arm portion 820b described later. A part of can be accommodated.

  In addition, a protruding reinforcing member 800 b is formed on the distal end side of the connecting rod 800 and protrudes from the side surface of the connecting rod 800 in the circumferential direction of the rotation locus. When the door-shaped front member 200 rotates from the open position to the closed position, that is, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the protruding reinforcing member 800b is attached to the base member 215a on which the stop shaft 703 (see FIG. 41) is supported. It is formed at a position where it abuts and is pressed toward the center of rotation. For this reason, when closing the door-shaped front member 200, the load applied to the stop shaft 703 and the connection rod 800 can be dispersed compared to the case where the connection rod 800 is pressed only by the stop shaft 703, and the stop due to the concentration of the load is prevented. Breakage of the shaft 703 or the connecting rod 800 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the sliding guide member 801 is a member for guiding the connecting rod 800 in the radial direction of the rotation trajectory, and is formed of resin and has a substantially U-shaped cross section in which a surface facing the image display body 500 is opened. And a pair of flange portions 801b extending in the vertical direction from the rear edge on the front end side. As shown in FIG. 45, the flange portion 801b is attached to the back surface of the image display body 500 in a state of protruding from the groove-like accommodation portion 500b, and an attachment screw is inserted through each central portion. Through-holes are formed.

  47 and 49, a rectangular opening 801c through which the telescopic arm 820 passes is formed in the side surface of the sliding guide member 801 along the longitudinal direction. Is formed with a semicircular cutout 801d that can accommodate the connecting portion of the telescopic arm 820 extending to the bottom surface. The notch 801d is formed at a position that coincides with the notch 800e formed in the connecting rod 800 in the vertical direction when the connecting rod 800 is in an immersive state. It has come to be.

  The telescopic arm 820 includes a first arm portion 820a whose one end is pivotally supported with respect to a support shaft 830 (see FIG. 45) fixed to the back surface of the image display body 500, and both ends are connected to the distal end side of the first arm portion 820a. The second arm portion 820b is pivotally supported by the base portion 800a of the heel 800, and is configured to be bent into a “<” shape. More specifically, the first arm portion 820a includes a C-shaped support ring 820c on the base end side and is externally fitted to the support shaft 830 so as to be rotatable. Note that the position of the support shaft 830 is set at a position deviating from the sliding straight line of the connecting rod 800 (that is, the inside of the sliding guide member 801) to the rear side, and the connecting rod 800 protrudes most (see FIG. 49 (b)), the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod 800 and the longitudinal direction of the first arm portion 820a are substantially parallel. On the other hand, when the connecting rod 800 is immersed (see FIG. 49 (a)), the first arm The tip side of the portion 820a is in a state of being bitten into the connecting rod 800. Note that a connecting portion having substantially the same diameter as the support ring 820c is formed on the distal end side of the first arm portion 820a, and a shaft hole portion 820d is formed therein.

  The second arm portion 820b has a glasses-like shape in plan view, and connection portions having shaft hole portions 820e and 820f having the same diameter as the shaft hole portion 820d are formed on both ends thereof. Then, the shaft hole portion 820d of the first arm portion 820a and the shaft hole portion 820e of the second arm portion 820b are rotatably connected to each other via the rotation shaft 821a, and connected to the shaft hole portion 820f of the second arm portion 820b. The shaft hole portion 800d of the flange 800 is connected to each other through a rotation shaft 821b so as to be rotatable. Note that the thickness of the second arm portion 820b in the height direction is thinner than that of the first arm portion 820a, so that the second arm portion 820b can sink into the space formed in the lower portion of the connecting rod 800.

  As described above, the telescopic arm 820 is configured to bend in the radial direction of the rotation trajectory. Therefore, when the telescopic arm 820 is folded, the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod 800 can be shortened. In particular, since the support shaft 830 is disposed at a position off the sliding straight line of the connecting rod 800, when the telescopic arm 820 is retracted, that is, when the telescopic arm 820 is folded, the connecting rod 800 is moved to the sliding guide member. It becomes possible to insert it to the innermost part of 801.

  Incidentally, the connecting rod 800 is supported so as to be swingable within a predetermined range in the same direction as the rotation locus of the image display body 500 around the rotation shaft 821b. As shown in FIG. 49, the inner width M of the sliding guide member 801 is set to be somewhat larger than the lateral width W of the connecting rod 800. For this reason, the connecting rod 800 can be swung within the rotation range limited by the swing restricting portion 805, and the protruding direction of the connecting rod 800 can be changed. Therefore, even if the relative position of the door-shaped front member 200 with respect to the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500 changes during the rotation of the door-shaped front member 200, it is possible to suppress an excessive force from being applied to the connecting rod 800. Warpage and breakage of the connecting rod 800 during rotation can be prevented.

  The swing restricting portion 805 is provided on the distal end side of the sliding guide member 801, and is configured such that the swingable range becomes narrower as the protruding length of the connecting rod 800 becomes shorter. That is, the distance between the rotating outer edge side of the image display body 500 and the rotating outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 tends to increase as the opening angle of the door-shaped front member 200 increases (in other words, the door shape). In contrast, in this example, the swingable range becomes narrower as the door-shaped front member 200 approaches the closed position, and therefore the opening degree of each member is reduced. Only swinging within an appropriate range is allowed. For this reason, the backlash of the image display body 500 during the rotation of the door-shaped front member 200 can be suppressed as much as possible, and can be rotated in a stable state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45, a braking member 500c protruding outward is formed on the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. Further, a protruding portion 800f protruding to the opposite side of the protruding reinforcing member 800b is formed on the side surface of the connecting rod 800, and when the image display body 500 is in the closed position as shown in FIG. That is, when the connecting rod 800 is in the immersive position, the position is set so that the braking member 500c and the protruding portion 800f abut each other. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the connecting rod 800 from swinging when the image display body 500 is closed. As a result, in the usable state where the image display body 500 is closed, the image display body 500 is brought into a fixed position. It can be held, and the generation of abnormal noise due to vibration during the game can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 46, an elastic cantilever type stopper 801 s is formed on the side surface of the base portion of the sliding guide member 801. The stopper 801s is for holding and holding the connecting rod 800 removed from the stop shaft 703 inside the sliding guide member 801. The stopper 801s engages with a circular portion of the connecting rod 800 on the base 800a side and engages with the circular portion of the connecting rod 800. Prevent blindness.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, when changing the model, the outer main body 100 and the door-shaped front member 200 are used as they are and the main control board 409 and the peripheral control board 510 are included. It becomes possible to exchange only the configuration of Therefore, the burden on the cost for changing the model can be reduced, and the replacement part can be reduced in size and weight, so that workability in transportation and installation is improved. In particular, since each unit is exchanged, handling becomes easy, and it is possible to exchange quickly even at a game store.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this example, a plurality of unit side connectors 425 and the like connected to the main control board 409 and the peripheral control board 510 are arranged, and are detachably connected to the main body side connector 124 and the like. Is possible. In particular, the plurality of main body side connectors 124 and the like are gathered and arranged in one place in the outer main body 100, while the plurality of unit side connectors 425 and the like are collectively supported by one connector holder 428. By a single operation, a plurality of sets of connectors can be connected at the same time, and workability related to the connection can be improved.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, since the fitting direction of the unit side connector 425 and the like is guided with respect to the main body side connector 124 and the like fixed to the outer main body 100, smoothly. And it becomes possible to connect easily and workability | operativity can be improved significantly. In addition, since the unit side guide part 452 is formed in the connector holder 428, the fitting of the two unit side connectors 425 and 427 can be guided by one unit side guide part 452, and each unit side connector and Compared to the case where the guide portion is formed on the main body side connector, it can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, since the connection state between the unit side connector 425 and the main body side connector 124 and the like is held by the binding band 454, the state of the binding band 454 can be visually recognized. A game store or the like can recognize that the unit-side connector 425 or the like has been removed from the connector 124 or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the control from being changed by an unauthorized action, and to ensure the reliability of the main control board 409 and the like. In particular, since the unit side guide portion 452 is fixed to the main body side guide portion 453 by binding the binding band 454 through the unit side through hole 460 and the main body side through hole 461, the connected state can be achieved with an extremely simple configuration. While being able to hold | maintain, an unauthorized act can be easily grasped | ascertained according to the state of the binding band 454. Note that when the old game unit 50 is removed from the game store, it is only necessary to cut the binding band 454 with a scissors or the like, so that the burden on the operator at the time of replacement can be reduced.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, the notch-shaped groove portion 460a through which the binding band 454 passes is formed not only in the connector holder 428 but also on the rear end side of the hole forming member 464 serving as the unit side guide portion 452. Therefore, even when the hole forming member 464 is formed on the back side of the connector holder 428, the insertion position of the binding band 454 can be brought closer to the operator side, and workability can be improved. Even when the hole forming member 464 has a relatively large thickness, the binding band 454 can be easily inserted into the hole forming member 464.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, since the entry guide portion 465 is formed on the upper surface of the connector holder 428, even when the unit side through hole 460 is formed on the back side of the connector holder 428, the binding is performed. The tip of the band 454 can reach the unit side through hole 460 relatively easily, and the workability can be further improved. Further, since the delivery guide portion 466 is formed in the hole forming member 464, it is naturally sent out forward without performing work such as drawing out the binding band 454 inserted through the unit side through hole 460, The hole forming member 464 can be annularly disposed so as to surround the hole forming member 464. Therefore, it is possible to perform the bundling work more easily.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, the screw 469 for fixing the unit side connector 425 or the like to the connector holder 428 is screwed into the surface of the connector holder 428 facing the main body side connector 124 or the like. Unauthorized operation of removing the unit side connector 425 and the like from the main body side connector 124 and the like while maintaining the fixed state of the unit side guide portion 452 with respect to the main body side guide portion 453 is prevented.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this example, since the main body side guide portion 453 is formed in the cover body 121, the fitting direction of the unit side connector 425 and the like can be achieved without providing a dedicated main body side fixing portion member separately. The overall structure can be further simplified. Further, since the cover body 121 covers the connector board 122 and the like, the connector board 122 cannot be removed from the outer main body 100 without removing the cover body 121. Therefore, the crime prevention effect can be further enhanced. Further, since the screw for fixing the cover body 121 is screwed into a position facing the connector holder 428, the cover body 121 is connected to the connector 124 while the unit side guide portion 452 is fixed to the main body side guide portion 453. Is prevented from being removed.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present example, the front opening / closing member 501 is rotated in the same direction as the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 is moved sideways to the front opening / closing member 501. Since the connecting tool 80 for transmission is provided, not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400, particularly the state of the binding band 454, can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of this example, the main control board 409 is assembled on the inner surface of the rear plate of the case member 400, and the wiring work space 408 is formed in front of the main control board 409. Wiring work to the attached main control board 409 is facilitated. In particular, since the wiring work space 408 and the unit side connector 425 and the like can be disposed adjacent to each other, the length of the harness connecting them is shortened, and the connecting work can be easily performed in the wiring work space 408. It becomes possible to do.

  Furthermore, according to the slot machine 1 of this example, since the effect display device 590 is provided on the front side of the front opening / closing member 501, the display screen is formed relatively large so that a powerful image can be clearly seen. Is possible. Further, since the peripheral control board 510 for deriving a predetermined effect in the effect display device 590 is assembled on the back side of the front opening / closing member 501, the effect display device 590 and the peripheral control substrate 510 are integrally configured. As a result, handling becomes easy and complexity in the case member 400 can be suppressed.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the main body side connector and the unit side connector, two sets of connectors are connected. However, three or more sets of connectors may be connected.

  In the above embodiment, the protrusion 462 is formed in the main body side guide portion 453 and the hole portion 463 is formed in the unit side guide portion 452, but the relationship between the protrusion and the hole is reversed. May be. That is, a hole portion may be formed in the main body side guide portion, and a protruding portion inserted into the hole portion may be formed in the unit side guide portion. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although what formed only one set of the unit side guide part 452 and the main body side guide part 453 was shown, you may make it form two sets.

  In the above embodiment, the binding band 454 is used as the connection state holding means. However, when the connection state between the connectors is released, a trace remains, that is, the connection state is not broken or disconnected. Any member that cannot be released can be used. For example, it is possible to use a seal seal, and according to this, it becomes possible to maintain the connected state with a very simple configuration. However, when a seal seal is used, when the gaming unit 50 is replaced, a mark of the seal seal remains on the connector, making it difficult to reuse.

  In the above embodiment, the effect display device 590 is assembled to the front opening / closing member 501, that is, the effect display device 590 is incorporated as a part of the game unit 50 in a replaceable manner. The door-shaped front member 200 may be assembled. According to this, it becomes possible to handle the effect display device 590 as a common component. Even if the same effect display device 590 is adopted, the effect displayed on the effect display device 590 (more specifically, the effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 590, hereinafter referred to as the effect display device 590). It is possible to provide a gaming machine with a different concept.

  In the coupling tools 700 and 80 of the above-described embodiment, the rod 702 and the coupling rod 800 are supported so as to be slidable in the radial direction of the rotation locus, and the rotation outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 and the rotation of the front opening / closing member 501 are supported. Although what is made to appear and disappear according to the change in the distance from the moving outer edge is shown, the configuration is such that the rotation locus of the front opening / closing member 501 is made to coincide with the rotation locus having the rotation axis of the door-shaped front member 200 as the rotation center. In this case, the rotating outer edges of the door-shaped front member 200 and the front opening / closing member 501 may be connected by a connecting rod that does not slide.

[Replacing gaming units]
When changing the game content or changing the game model, the members and electrical parts disposed on the outer main body 100 and the door-shaped front member 200 are left and used as they are, and only the game unit 50 is used. It is removed from the main body side (the outer main body 100 and the door-shaped front member 200), and a new game unit 50 is housed and fixed inside the outer main body 100. Hereinafter, a specific work procedure when the game unit 50 is replaced will be described.

[Removing the gaming unit from the outer body 100]
When a key (key) is inserted into the locking device 215 on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200 shown in FIG. 2 and turned clockwise, the lock is released and the door-shaped front member 200 is released from the outer body 100. be able to. When the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled forward with respect to the outer main body 100, the door-shaped front member 200 rotates in a direction to open the interior with respect to the outer main body 100 around the rotation shaft 100a (see FIGS. 1 and 40). Move. At this time, in the image display body 500, the lower end portion of the retaining shaft 703 supported by the support piece 215b of the door-shaped front member 200 by the connector 700 (see FIGS. 40 and 41) is the fixed sheath of the image display body 500. By being connected to the rod 702 sliding inside the member 701, the image display body 500 rotates integrally with the door-shaped front member 200 around the hinge fitting 420 (see FIGS. 39 and 40). As a result, the opening 401 of the case member 400 is exposed.

  Next, a hand is put in the opening 401 of the case member 400, and the connector holder 428 (see FIG. 4) in the wiring work space 408 at the back is removed from the wiring relay member 113. As shown in FIG. 4, the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinders 128 and 128 of the wiring relay member 113 by left and right button-type panel fasteners 432 and 432. When the left and right button-shaped panel fasteners 432 and 432 are picked and pulled about 5 mm in the front direction, the connection between the left and right button-shaped panel fasteners 432 and 432 and the support cylinders 128 and 128 is released. Then, by supporting the left and right attachment pieces 431 and 431 of the connector holder 428 by hand and pulling it forward, the connector connection between the connector 124 of the wiring relay member 113 and the connector 425 of the connector holder 428 is released, and the wiring When the connector connection between the connector 125 of the relay member 113 and the connector 427 of the connector holder 428 is released, both the connectors 425 and 427 can be removed. The connector holder 428 removed from the wiring relay member 113 is arranged on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418 (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the connector holder 428 does not move during transportation of the gaming unit.

  Next, the upper left and right stoppers 117 shown in FIGS. 1 and 26 are manually turned from the inside of the game unit and rotated to a position where they are not engaged with the locking holes 442 (see FIG. 7) of the case member 400. (Release of forward restriction of case member 400). Further, the lower stopper 117 is rotated to the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 26 to defeat it (removal of forward restriction of the case member 400).

  Next, the retaining shaft 703 of the coupler 700 shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 41 is lifted upward against the bias of the spring 703a, and the engagement between the retaining shaft 703 and the rod is released, and the image is kept. The display body 500 is rotated around the hinge bracket 420 in a direction to close the opening 401 of the case member 400. Then, the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed with the image display 500, and the lock piece 421 shown in FIG. In this state, the image display body 500 is locked in a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. As a result, the gaming unit 50 is only placed on the partition plate 105 (see FIG. 1) of the outer main body 100.

  Next, as described above, the case member 400 is pulled out by placing a finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10 between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500. Accordingly, the gaming unit 50 is pulled out together with the case member 400 with respect to the outer main body 100. The gaming unit 50 is removed from the outer main body 100 as described above. The procedure for storing and fixing the new gaming unit 50 inside the opening of the outer main body 100 is reversed.

[Electrical system deployed in slot machines]
Next, an electric system provided in the slot machine 1 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the control configuration of the slot machine 1 includes a main control board 409 and a peripheral control board 510 arranged on the game unit 50 side, and various controls are shared. 50 shows a main control board 409 (see FIGS. 3 and 6) and a main body arranged on the game unit 50 (consisting of the symbol variation display device 300 + the case member 400 + the image display body 500 as shown in FIG. 5). 4 is a block diagram of a main relay board 122 provided on the side (wiring relay member 113 provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100). FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the main relay board 122 and the peripheral relay board 123 accommodated in the wiring relay member 113.

[Main relay board 122]
As shown in FIG. 53, the main relay board 122 includes a connector CN1 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN1 of the main relay board 122) for connection to the power supply board 112s and a connector 425 with a harness connected to the main control board 409 ( 11 is connected to a connector 124 (see FIG. 9, hereinafter referred to as a connector CN2 of the main relay board 122) and a main door relay board 850 disposed on the back surface of a door-shaped front member 200 described later. External relay that relays to output game information of the slot machine 1 to the connector CN3 (hereinafter referred to as the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122) and a hall computer (not shown) installed in the game hall (hall) Connector CN4 (hereinafter referred to as connector CN4 of main relay board 122) connected to terminal board 131 (see FIG. 1), and medal release Connector CN5 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN5 of the main relay board 122) connected to the device 110 and a connector CN6 (hereinafter referred to as a medal auxiliary storage switch 111a disposed in the auxiliary storage box 111 for medals). And a connector CN7 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN7 of the main relay board 122) connected to the door opening detection switch 220. The main relay board 122 serves as a relay (relay input or relay output) that simply allows various signals and power supply voltages to pass through. In the following description, since there is a connector for each board, the symbol “CN” may overlap between different boards.

  The power supply board 112s in FIG. 50 receives AC24V (two terminals) as input and generates a backup power supply for the memory of the main control board 409 and various DC operating power supplies (+ 30V power supply, + 12V power supply, + 24V power supply), and the main relay board 122 is supplied to the connector CN1. In addition, the code | symbol FG (one terminal) is connected to the earth | ground of amusement island equipment via the power harness which is not shown in figure. The housing FG terminal (one terminal) is connected to the metal part of the gaming machine main body as a ground.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the number of pins of connectors CN1, CN4, CN5, CN6 and CN7 of the main relay board 122 and signals transmitted by the pins. As shown in FIGS. 50 and 54, the connector CN1 (to the power supply board 112s) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 12 pins. Pins 1 to 5 of the connector CN1 are all relay inputs for the ground GND. Pin 6 is a relay input for backup power supply (-) (0V), Pins 7 and 8 are both + 30V power supply relay inputs, and Pins 9 and 10 are both relays for + 12V power supply The 11th pin is a + 24V power supply relay input, and the 12th pin is a backup power supply (+) (+ 5V) relay input.

  The connector CN4 (external relay terminal board 131) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 10 pins. Pin 1 of connector CN4 is the relay output of external signal 5, pin 2 is the relay output of external signal 4, pin 3 is the relay output of external signal 3, pin 4 is the relay output of external signal 2, pin 5 Is a relay output of the external signal 1. Further, the 6th pin of the connector CN4 is a relay output of the medal payout signal, and the 7th pin is a relay output of the medal insertion signal. Further, the 8th to 10th pins of the connector CN4 are all relay outputs of the + 24V power source.

  The connector CN5 (to the medal discharge device 110) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 5 pins. Pin 1 of connector CN5 is a relay output of S + 5V (meaning sensor + 5V power supply, hereinafter referred to as sensor + 5V power supply), pin 2 is a relay input of game medal payout count switch signal, pin 3 Is the ground GND, the 4th pin is the relay output of the game medal payout drive 1, and the 5th pin is the relay output of the game medal payout drive 2.

  The connector CN6 (to the medal auxiliary storage switch 111a) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 2 pins. The first pin of the connector CN5 is a relay input of the signal of the overflow switch (medal auxiliary storage switch 111a), and the second pin is the ground GND. Further, the connector CN7 (to-door opening detection switch 220) of the main relay board 122 is composed of 2 pins. The first pin of the connector CN7 is a relay input for the signal of the door opening detection switch 220, and the second pin is a ground GND.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the number of pins of the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122 and signals transmitted by the respective pins. As shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122 is composed of 30 pins and is connected to the main door relay board 850. As shown by a “door block” surrounded by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 50, a main door relay board 850, a medal selector 207 connected to the main door relay board 850, a stored medal settlement button 209, a MAX bet button 206, a 1-bet button 205, a start lever 210, a reel stop button 211 (211a to 211c), and a batting release / error release switch 215c are disposed on the door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 59).

  FIG. 59 is a rear view of the door-shaped front member 200 of the slot machine 1. The door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the front surface of the outer main body 100 (see FIG. 1) of the slot machine so as to be rotatable in a laterally open door shape. That is, the door-shaped front member 200 can be rotated about the axis on the front side of the outer body 100 as a rotation axis. As shown in FIG. 59, a door substrate storage case 900 that houses a main door relay substrate (not shown) and a door decoration drive substrate (not shown) is provided in the approximate center of the rear surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It is arranged. An L speaker (left speaker) 201a and an R speaker (right speaker) 201b are disposed on the left and right sides of the lower part of the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200.

  FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the door substrate storage case 900. FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, the door substrate storage case 900 has a door decoration drive substrate on the side of a rectangular door decoration drive substrate storage portion 901 that houses a door decoration drive substrate 860 (only the reference numeral is shown). The main door relay board storage portion 902 is integrally formed so as to have a smaller quadrangular shape and house the main door relay board 850 (only the reference numeral is shown).

  As shown in FIG. 50, the main door relay board 850 includes a medal selector 207, a stored medal settlement button 209, a MAX bet button 206, a 1 bet button 205, a start lever 210, a reel stop button 211 (a left reel stop button 211a, a middle A reel stop button 211b, a right reel stop button 211c), and a batting release / error release switch 215c are connected.

  In FIG. 60, reference numeral 903 denotes a storage case cover that covers the entire top surface of the door substrate storage case 900. A connector with a harness connected to the medal selector 207 is attached to the outer surface of the storage case cover 903 of the main door relay substrate storage portion 902. The medal selector connection connector 852 (shown in FIG. 50) for connecting the medal selector connection connector 851 (configured with 10 pins as shown in FIG. 50) and the connector with harness connected to the stored medal adjustment button 209. Connected to the MAX bet button 206, a connector for a bet button 853 (configured with 4 pins as shown in FIG. 50), and a 1 bet button 205. 1-bet button connection connector 8 for connecting the harness-attached connector 4 (configured with 2 pins as shown in FIG. 50), start lever connection connector 855 (configured with 3 pins as shown in FIG. 50) for connecting the connector with harness connected to the start lever 210, and reel stop Reel stop button connection connector 856 (consisting of 8 pins as shown in FIG. 50) for connecting the connector with harness connected to the button 211 and the connector with harness connected to the batting release / error release switch 215c. Connector 857 (consisting of two pins as shown in FIG. 50) and a connector for connecting to the main body for sending each signal mainly from the main door relay board 850 to the main relay board 122 on the main body side The member 858 (composed of a 30-pin female die) is disposed in an exposed state.

  The connection between the main door relay board 850 and the main relay board 122 is a connector with a harness provided at one end with a connector member corresponding to the main body connection board member 858 (CN1) of the main door relay board 850 (a connection well known in the art). And the connector CN3 (see FIG. 50 and FIG. 50) of the main relay board 122 is connected to one end of the connector with the harness to the connector connecting member 858 (CN1) of the main door relay board 850. 53), the other end of the connector 910 with harness (see FIG. 9) is connected.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the first pin of the connector CN3 of the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the + 24V power source, and the second pin is the relay output of the drive signal to the lockout solenoid of the medal selector 207. The pin is the ground GND. Pin 4 is the relay output of the + 5V power supply for the medal passage sensor of the medal selector 207, pin 5 is the relay input of the medal passage sensor (medal insertion switch 1) signal of the medal selector 207, and pin 6 is the medal selector. The relay input of the signal 207 of the medal passage sensor (medal insertion switch 2), the seventh pin is the relay input of the signal of the medal insertion lever detection switch of the medal selector 207, and the eighth pin is the ground GND.

  The ninth pin is a relay input of a switch signal of the stored medal settlement button 209 (stored medal settlement switch), and the tenth pin is a ground GND. The 11th pin is the relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, the 12th pin is the relay input of the switch signal of the MAX bet button 206 (stored medal insertion switch 2), and the 13th pin is the lighting signal of the stored medal insertion switch LED. The 14th pin is the ground GND. The 15th pin is a relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, the 16th pin is a relay input of the switch signal of the 1-bet button 205 (stored medal insertion switch 1), and the 17th pin is a ground GND. Pin 18 is the relay output of the + 5V power supply for the sensor of the lever sensor of the start lever 210 (rotary rotation start device), the 19th pin is the ground GND, and the 20th pin is the start lever 210 (rotor rotation start device). ) Lever sensor signal relay input.

  The 21st pin is a relay input of the signal of the left reel stop button 211a corresponding to the first cylinder, and the 22nd pin is a relay input of the signal of the middle reel stop button 211b corresponding to the second cylinder. The pin is a relay input of the signal of the right reel stop button 211c corresponding to the third cylinder, and the 24th pin is the ground GND. Pin 25 is the relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, pin 26 is the relay output of the stop button LED1 lighting signal, pin 27 is the relay output of the stop button LED2 lighting signal, and pin 28 is It is a relay output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED3. The 29th pin is the relay output of the sensor + 5V power supply, and the 30th pin is the relay input of the signal of the reset switch (stop release / error release switch 215c).

[Connector connection between main relay board 122 and main control board 409]
As shown in FIG. 50, the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is connected to the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 (connected via the connection between the connector 124 of FIG. 53 and the connector 425 with the harness 424 of FIG. ) The connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 and the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are composed of 64 pins.

  56 is a diagram showing the number of pins of connector CN2 of main relay board 122 and signals transmitted by each pin, and FIG. 57 is the number of pins of connector CN1 of main control board 409 and signals transmitted by each pin. FIG. Note that the pin numbers of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 in FIG. 56 and the pin numbers of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 in FIG. 57 correspond to each other.

  The first pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 5, and the first pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 5. The second pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 4, and the second pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 4. The third pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 3, and the third pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 3. The 4th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 2, and the 4th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 2. The 5th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the external signal 1, and the 5th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the external signal 1.

  The 6th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is a medal payout signal output, and the 6th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of a medal payout signal. The 7th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is a medal insertion signal output, and the 7th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of a medal insertion signal. The eighth pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the eighth pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is also the ground GND. The 9th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a game medal payout count switch signal, and the 9th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of a game medal payout / payout count switch signal. The 10th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the 10th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is also the ground GND.

  The 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 1, and the 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 1. Relay input. The 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 2, and the 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are the outputs of the game medal payout device drive 2. Relay input.

  The 15th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is the ground GND, and the 15th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is also the ground GND. The 16th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of an overflow switch signal (switch signal of the medal auxiliary storage switch 111a), and the 16th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the overflow switch signal. is there. The 17th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a door open detection switch signal, and the 17th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the door open detection switch signal. Pins 18 to 23 of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all ground GND, and pins 18 to 23 of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are also ground GND.

  The 24th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a drive signal output to the lockout solenoid of the medal selector 207, and the 24th pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is driven to the lockout solenoid of the medal selector 207. This is a signal relay input. The 25th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the medal insertion switch 1 signal of the medal selector 207, and the 25th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the medal insertion switch 1 signal of the medal selector 207. It is. The 26th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the medal insertion switch 2 signal of the medal selector 207, and the 26th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the medal insertion switch 2 signal of the medal selector 207. It is. The 27th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the medal insertion lever detection switch signal of the medal selector 207, and the 27th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the medal insertion lever detection switch signal of the medal selector 207. Relay output. The 28th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a stored medal settlement switch signal (stored medal settlement button 209), and the 28th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of a stored medal settlement switch signal. is there.

  The 29th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the stored medal insertion switch 1 signal (1 bet button 205), and the 29th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the stored medal insertion switch 1 signal. It is. Pin 30 of connector CN1 of main control board 409 is an input of stored medal insertion switch 2 signal (MAX bet button 206), and pin 30 of connector CN2 of main relay board 122 is a relay output of stored medal insertion switch 2 signal. It is. The 31st pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the lever sensor signal of the start lever 210 (rotating cylinder rotation starting device), and the 31st pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the start lever 210 (rotating cylinder rotation). It is a relay output of the lever sensor signal of the starting device.

  The 32nd pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a signal input of a reset switch (stop release / error release switch 215c), and the 32nd pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is a reset switch (stop release / stop). This is a relay output of the signal of the error release switch 215c). The 33rd pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a signal input of the left reel stop button 211a corresponding to the first cylinder, and the 33rd pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 corresponds to the first cylinder. It is a relay output of the signal of the left reel stop button 211a. The 34th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is a signal input of the middle reel stop button 211b corresponding to the second cylinder, and the 34th pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 corresponds to the second cylinder. This is a relay output of the signal of the middle reel stop button 211b. The 35th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of a signal of the right reel stop button 211c corresponding to the third cylinder, and the 35th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 corresponds to the third cylinder. This is a relay output of the signal of the right reel stop button 211c.

  The 36th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED1, and the 36th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay input of the lighting signal of the stop button LED1. The 37th pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED2, and the 37th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay input of the lighting signal of the stop button LED2. The 38th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the output of the lighting signal of the stop button LED3, and the 38th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay input of the lighting signal of the stop button LED3. The 39th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the output of the lighting signal of the stored medal insertion switch LED, and the 39th pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is the relay input of the lighting signal of the stored medal insertion switch LED. .

  The 40th pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is the input of the backup power supply (-) (0V), and the 40th pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is the relay output of the backup power supply (-) (0V). . The 41st pin of the connector CN1 on the main control board 409 is an S + 5V (sensor + 5V power supply) output, and the 41st pin of the connector CN2 on the main relay board 122 is an S + 5V (sensor + 5V power supply) relay input. The 42nd pin of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 is an input of the backup power supply (+) (+ 5V), and the 42nd pin of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 is a relay output of the backup power supply (+) (+ 5V). .

  The 43rd to 49th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all the ground GND, and the 43rd to 49th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all the ground GND. In addition, the 50th to 56th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all + 12V power input, and the 50th to 56th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all + 12V power relay outputs. It is.

  The 57th to 60th pins of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all the ground GND, and the 57th to 60th pins of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all the ground GND. Also, the pins 61 to 64 of the connector CN1 of the main control board 409 are all inputs of + 30V power, and the pins 61 to 64 of the connector CN2 of the main relay board 122 are all outputs of + 30V power. It is.

[Main control board]
FIG. 51 is a block diagram of the main control board 409 and the peripheral control board 510 provided in the gaming unit 50. As shown in FIG. 50, the main control board 409 is connected to the main relay board 122 described above, and is connected to a gaming state display board 450 by a connector constituted by 12 pins, and a connector constituted by 24 pins. The reel main relay board 315 (see FIG. 23) is connected through the connector, and the function separation relay terminal plate 441 is connected by two connectors each having eight pins. Although not shown, the gaming state display board 450 is provided with a credit display unit, a game number display unit, a payout number display unit, a medal in lamp, a start lamp, a bet lamp, a bonus flag notification lamp, and the like. A reel motor relay board (reference numeral 326 in FIG. 25) corresponding to the left reel motor 321a is connected to the reel main relay board 315 via a connector composed of 9 pins, and the reel motor relay corresponding to the middle reel motor 321b. The board is connected via a connector consisting of 9 pins, and the reel motor relay board corresponding to the right reel motor 321c is connected via a connector consisting of 9 pins.

  Although not shown, the main control board 409 includes a main control MPU as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), the left reel motor 321a and the middle reel motor 321b described above. And a drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the right reel motor 321c, a setting key (keyhole) for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1, a setting switch / error canceling, a hitting / non-stop switch, and a settlement / non-check switch Etc. are provided. The main control MPU has a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU includes the 1-bet button 205, the MAX bet button 206, the stored medal settlement button 209, the start lever 210, the reel stop button 211 (the left reel stop button 211a, the middle reel stop button 211b, and the right reel stop button 211c. ), Medal selector 207 (lockout solenoid, passage sensor, lever sensor), door opening detection switch 220, game medal payout count switch of the medal releasing device 110, and detection from the medal auxiliary storage switch 111a of the auxiliary storage box 111 for medals. Signals are input via the main control I / O port, and based on these detection signals, a lockout solenoid, a credit display unit, a game number display unit, a payout number display unit, a medal in lamp, a start lamp, a bet Lamp with bonus flag A drive signal to the drive means of the known lamp and medal discharge unit 110 via the main control I / O port, and outputs.

  The main control MPU includes a main control I / O port, a reel main relay board 315, a left reel motor 321a that rotates the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c via the reel motor relay boards, and a middle reel. A left reel position sensor (reference numeral 325 in FIG. 25) that outputs drive signals to the motor 321b and the right reel motor 321c, and detects the original positions of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c, and a middle reel position sensor In addition, a detection signal from the right reel position sensor is input.

  The main control MPU receives a signal from a setting switch / error release, a stop / non-stop switch, a settlement / non-payout switch, a stop / release cancel switch 215c, a medal payout signal, a main control I / O port, A medal insertion signal, a game status, and the like are output to the external relay terminal board 131.

"Setting switch / error reset"
The role of the setting switch / error cancellation changes depending on the setting key status. When the setting key is OFF (playable state), it functions as an error release switch. On the other hand, when the setting key is ON (setting change state), it functions as a setting switch.

[Setting key and setting switch / error reset]
Next, a procedure for changing the setting of the slot machine 1 will be described. First, the slot machine 1 is turned off, and the setting key switch is operated in this state. Specifically, a predetermined key is inserted into the setting key switch, and the key is rotated 90 degrees to the right. Next, the slot machine 1 is turned on with the key inserted in the setting key switch. The power is turned on by operating the power switch of the power supply unit. When the power is turned on, the current setting of the slot machine 1 is displayed on the credit display unit (for example, in the case of setting 1, “1” is displayed on the credit display unit). Next, the setting switch is operated. When the setting switch is operated, a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value displayed on the credit display unit is displayed. However, when the displayed numerical value is 6, the displayed value is returned to 1 without being added. When the setting switch is operated in this way and a desired setting value is displayed on the credit display unit, the start lever 210 is operated. By operating the start lever 210, the setting is confirmed. Turn the key 90 degrees to the left, and remove the key inserted in the setting key switch. When the power is turned on next time, the gaming machine operates with the set value set previously.

  In this way, for example, when a set value is set by a person in charge on the hall side, a slot machine game is played based on the set value. Specifically, in the present embodiment, there are “1” to “6” as setting values, and any of these setting values is set. The probability of winning a bonus in the internal lottery varies for each set value. When the set value is “1”, the winning probability is the lowest, and the bonus increases step by step as the set value increases to “2” and “3”. The winning probability is high, and the winning probability is highest when the set value is “6”. Instead of having different bonus winning probabilities for each set value, the probabilities of entering a game advantageous to the player, such as replay time, may be different for each set value. In addition, both the bonus winning probability and the probability of entering a game advantageous to the player such as replay time may be different.

[Stopper switch]
First, “stopping” is a state in which a medal is not accepted after the bonus game is over. The stop / non-stop switch is a switch for determining whether to “stop” after the bonus game ends or to allow the game to be continued.

[Checkout switch]
“Checkout” means that credits are settled after the bonus game is completed, that is, medals for the credits are paid out. The settlement / non-payment switch is a switch for determining whether or not to “settlement” after the bonus game ends or “settlement”.

  The external relay terminal board 131 (see FIG. 50) is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). The hall computer grasps the number of medals inserted into the slot machine 1 by a medal insertion signal, grasps the number of medals paid out by the slot machine 1 by a medal payout signal, and the gaming state of the slot machine 1 by the game status Count management is done by grasping.

  In FIG. 51, a function separation relay terminal plate 441 is connected to the main control board 409 by two connectors each having eight pins. In addition, a peripheral control board 510 (to be described later) is connected to the function separation relay terminal board 441 by two connectors each having eight pins. A connector composed of 8 pins without arrows is for power supply relay, and ground GND is composed of 4 pins, + 12V power supply is composed of 2 pins, and + 30V power supply is composed of 2 pins. Further, a connector composed of 8 pins indicated by arrows, such as main control board 409 → function separating relay terminal board 441 → peripheral control board 510, is for transmitting various commands related to games, and parallel data (command) D0. ˜D3, 4 pins, SEL (select signal) is 1 pin, WR (write signal) is 1 pin, power failure warning signal is 1 pin, and ground GND is 1 pin. The main control MPU transmits various commands related to games to a peripheral control board 510 described later via the main control I / O and function separation relay terminal board 441.

[Peripheral control board 510]
Although not shown, the peripheral control board 510 performs a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a peripheral control RAM for temporarily storing data, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC and a sound ROM storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC are provided. The peripheral control MPU incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port and a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal control board provided with a VDP or the like for controlling the display of the image display body 500 on the peripheral control board 510 is directly connected between the connectors (connected by a board-to-board connector). A liquid crystal data ROM substrate having an image ROM for storing various images to be displayed on the liquid crystal module (effect display device) 590 and a liquid crystal output substrate having a driver for the liquid crystal module (effect display device) 590 are connected to the control board. Are connected directly (each connected by a board-to-board connector).

  The peripheral control board 510 is connected to the above-described function separation relay terminal board 441 by a connector composed of two 8 pins, and a panel decoration relay board 594 is connected to the peripheral control board 510 by a connector composed of 24 pins. It is connected to a later-described peripheral relay substrate 123 disposed on the main body side by a connector connection composed of 20 pins.

  The above-mentioned liquid crystal control board connected to the peripheral control board 510 by the board-to-board connector is connected to the liquid crystal module 590 (which constitutes the effect display device in the embodiment) by a connector constituted by 30 pins, and constituted by 3 pins The liquid crystal inverter board 592 is connected by the connector to be connected, and the fan motor 593 of the image display body 500 is connected by the connector having two pins. Further, the other end of the ground wire 527 (see FIG. 20) connected to the metal fitting 522 that contacts the metal plate 521 on the back surface of the liquid crystal module 590 is connected to the liquid crystal control board by a connector constituted by one pin. It is in a state of being electrically grounded (connected to the ground GND). Further, the liquid crystal inverter board 592 is connected to the liquid crystal module 590 by four connectors each having two pins, and the liquid crystal inverter board 592 generates a backlight operating voltage of about + 200V by using a + 30V power supply as an input. To the liquid crystal module 590.

  The panel decoration relay board 594 is connected to an upper panel illumination LED board 595 by a connector constituted by 2 pins, and a backlight relay board 318 (see FIG. 23) is connected by a connector constituted by 5 pins. The backlight relay board 318 is provided with a backlight board (backlight 322a in FIG. 25) corresponding to the left reel 301a (first cylinder) via a connector with a harness that is composed of two pins. Arc-shaped substrate) is connected. Similarly, a backlight board corresponding to the middle reel 301b (second drum) is connected to the backlight relay board 318 via a connector with a harness composed of two pins, and the right reel 301c (third drum). ) Is connected via a connector with a harness composed of 2 pins.

[Connector connection between peripheral control board 510 and peripheral relay board 123]
52 is a block diagram of the peripheral control board 510 provided on the gaming unit 50 side and the peripheral relay board 123 provided on the main body side (the wiring relay member 113 provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100). The peripheral control board 510 and the peripheral relay board 123 are connected by a connector connection composed of 20 pins. Further, the peripheral relay board 123 is shown in FIG.

[Peripheral relay board 123]
As shown in FIG. 53, the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to a connector 427 with a harness 427 (see FIG. 11) connected to the peripheral control board 510 (see FIGS. 9 and 53; hereinafter, the peripheral relay board 123). Connector CN1), a connector CN2 (hereinafter referred to as a connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123) connected to a door decoration drive board 860 disposed on the back surface of a door-shaped front member 200, which will be described later, and a bass speaker (FIG. 1). The connector CN3 (hereinafter referred to as the connector of the peripheral relay board 123) connected to the speaker disposed on the back plate 104 at the rear position of the medal releasing device 110 disposed in the lower part of the outer main body 100 (see FIG. 30). CN3). The peripheral relay board 123 serves as a relay (relay input or relay output) for simply passing various signals and power supply voltages.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 (connected via the connection of the connector 125 of FIG. 53 and the connector 427 with the harness 426 of FIG. ) The connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 and the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 are composed of 20 pins.

  58 shows the number of pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 and the signal transmitted by each pin, the number of pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 and the signal transmitted by each pin, and the connector of the peripheral relay board 123. It is a figure which shows CN2 and the number of pins of connector CN3, and the signal transmitted by each pin.

  The first pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is -SPK-W2 (a negative output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221), and the first pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is -SPK-W2. Relay input (minus relay input for woofer W2 of bass speaker 221). The second pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is + SPK-W2 (a positive output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221), and the second pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-W2. (It is a positive relay input for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221).

  The third pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is -SPK-W1 (a negative output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), and the third pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is -SPK-W1. Relay input (minus relay input for woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221). The fourth pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 510 is + SPK-W1 (plus output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), and the fourth pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-W1. (It is a positive relay input for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221).

  The fifth pin of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 510 is -SPK-L (the negative output of the L speaker 201a), and the fifth pin of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of -SPK-L. (This is a negative relay input of the L speaker 201a). Pin 6 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 510 is + SPK-L (plus output of L speaker 201a), and pin 6 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-L (L This is a positive relay input of the speaker 201a).

  The 7th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is -SPK-R (the negative output of the R speaker 201b), and the 7th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of -SPK-R. (It is a minus relay input of the R speaker 201b). The eighth pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is + SPK-R (the positive output of the R speaker 201b), and the eighth pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of + SPK-R (R This is a positive relay input of the speaker 201b).

  The 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 are the ground GND, and the 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 are also the ground GND. The 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN3 on the peripheral control board 510 are outputs of + 12V power, and the 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN1 on the peripheral relay board 123 are relay inputs of + 12V power.

  The 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 are the ground GND, and the 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 are also the ground GND.

  The 15th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is an S-LATCH output (latch signal output), and the 15th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-LATCH relay input (latch signal). Relay input). The 16th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is an S-MODE output (mode signal output), and the 16th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-MODE relay input (mode signal). Relay input). The 17th pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral control board 510 is an S-CLK output (clock signal output), and the 17th pin of the connector CN1 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-CLK relay input (clock). Signal relay input). Pin 18 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 510 is S-DATA (output of serial lighting data), and pin 18 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of S-DATA (serial Is the relay input of the lighting data.)

  Pin 19 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 510 is SEL1 (output of select signal 1), and pin 18 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of SEL1 (relay input of select signal 1) Is). Pin 20 of connector CN3 of peripheral control board 510 is SEL0 (output of select signal 0), and pin 20 of connector CN1 of peripheral relay board 123 is a relay input of SEL0 (relay input of select signal 0) Is).

  As shown in FIG. 52, the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is composed of 20 pins and is connected to the door decoration drive board 860. In FIG. 52, as indicated by “door block” surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line, the door decoration driving substrate 860, the top decoration substrate 871, the upper left decoration substrate 872, the lower left decoration substrate 873, the upper right decoration substrate 874, and the lower right decoration substrate. 875, the lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876, the L speaker (left speaker) 201a, the R speaker (right speaker) 201b, and the lower panel illumination 877 connected to the lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 are disposed on the door-shaped front member 200. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the door decoration driving board 860 includes a top decoration board 871, an upper left decoration board 872, a lower left decoration board 873, an upper right decoration board 874, a lower right decoration board 875, a lower panel illumination lighting board 876, and an L speaker 201a. , R speaker 201b is connected. In this way, the door decoration drive board 860 that drives the lighting of the door-side decorative light emitting body (described later) disposed on the door-shaped front member 200 is separated from the peripheral control board 510 and is used as the door-shaped front member 200. It is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the top decorative board connection connector 861 for connecting the harness-attached connector connected to the top decorative board 871 to the outer surface of the storage case cover 903 of the door decorative drive board storage portion 901 of the door board storage case 900. (Configured with 12 pins as shown in FIG. 52), upper left decorative board connection connector 862 (configured with 13 pins as shown in FIG. 52) to connect the connector with harness connected to the upper left decorative board 872, and lower left A lower left decorative board connection connector 863 (consisting of 6 pins as shown in FIG. 52) for connecting a connector with a harness connected to the decorative board 873, and an upper right decoration for connecting a connector with a harness connected to the upper right decorative board 874. Connected to the board connector 864 (configured with 13 pins as shown in FIG. 52) and the lower right decorative board 875. For the lower panel lighting lighting board for connecting the connector for connecting the lower right decorative board 865 (configured with 6 pins as shown in FIG. 52) and the connector with the harness connected to the lower panel lighting lighting board 876. A connection connector 866 (configured with two pins as shown in FIG. 52), an L speaker connection connector 867 (configured with two pins as shown in FIG. 52) for connecting a connector with a harness connected to the L speaker 201a, and R speaker connection connector 868 (configured with two pins as shown in FIG. 52) for connecting the connector with harness connected to R speaker 201b, and each signal from door decoration drive board 860 to peripheral relay board 123 on the main body side. The connector connector member 859 to be sent out (configured with a 20-pin female die) is disposed in an exposed state.

[Connector connection between peripheral relay board 123 and door decoration drive board 860]
As shown in FIG. 52, the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to the connector CN1 of the peripheral control board 510. The connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 and the connector CN2 of the peripheral control board 510 are composed of 20 pins.

  The door decoration drive board 860 and the peripheral relay board 123 are connected to a connector with a harness provided at one end with a connector member corresponding to the body connection connector member 859 (CN1) of the door decoration drive board 860 (a well-known connection conventionally). One end of the connector with the harness is connected to the main body connecting connector member 859 (CN1) of the door decoration drive board 860, and the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 (see FIG. 53) is used. ) To the other end of the connector 920 with harness (see FIG. 9).

  58, only the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is shown, and the CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 is not shown. The first pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is the relay output of SEL0 (the relay output of the select signal 0), and the first pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is the input of SEL0 (the input of the select signal 0) Is). The second pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is the relay output of SEL1 (the relay output of the select signal 1), and the second pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is the input of SEL1 (the input of the select signal 1) Is).

  The third pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-DATA relay output (a relay output of serial lighting data), and the third pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is an S-DATA input ( Serial lighting data input). The 4th pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-CLK relay output (clock signal relay output), and the 4th pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is an S-CLK input (clock signal). Input).

  The fifth pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is an S-MODE relay output (mode signal relay output), and the fifth pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is an S-MODE input (mode signal). Input). The 6th pin of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 is the S-LATCH relay output (the relay output of the latch signal), and the 6th pin of the door decoration drive board 860 is the S-LATCH input (the latch signal). Input).

  The 7th and 8th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are the ground GND, and the 7th and 8th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are also the ground GND. The 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are relay outputs of + 12V power, and the 9th and 10th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are inputs of + 12V power. The 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are the ground GND, and the 11th and 12th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 are also the ground GND.

  The 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are + SPK-R relay outputs (plus relay output of the R speaker 201b), and the 13th pins and 14 of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860. The number pin is an input of + SPK-R (a positive input of the R speaker 201b). The 15th and 16th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are -SPK-R relay outputs (the negative relay output of the R speaker 201b), and the 15th pin of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860 and The 16th pin is an input of -SPK-R (a negative input of the R speaker 201b).

  The 17th and 18th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are + SPK-L relay outputs (plus relay output of the L speaker 201a), and the 17th and 18th pins of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860. The number pin is an input of + SPK-L (a positive input of the L speaker 201a). The 19th and 20th pins of the connector CN2 of the peripheral relay board 123 are -SPK-L relay outputs (the negative relay output of the L speaker 201a), the 19th pin of the connector CN1 of the door decoration drive board 860, and The 20th pin is an input of -SPK-L (a negative input of the L speaker 201a).

[Connector connection between peripheral relay board 123 and bass speaker 221]
As shown in FIG. 52, the connector CN3 of the peripheral relay board 123 is connected to the bass speaker 221. The connector CN3 of the peripheral relay board 123 is composed of 4 pins. As shown in FIG. 58, the first pin of the connector CN3 of the peripheral relay board 123 is + SPK-W1 (plus output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), and the second pin of the connector CN3 is -SPK- W1 (a minus output for the woofer W1 of the bass speaker 221), the third pin of the connector CN3 is + SPK-W2 (a plus output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221), and the connector CN3 The fourth pin is -SPK-W2 (a negative output for the woofer W2 of the bass speaker 221).

[Arrangement of each decorative board of door-shaped front member 200]
The arrangement positions of the above-described top decorative substrate 871, upper left decorative substrate 872, lower left decorative substrate 873, upper right decorative substrate 874, lower right decorative substrate 875, and lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 are shown in FIG. The top decorative substrate 871 is fitted into an edge member 214b that forms the upper side of the transparent plate 214a disposed in the upper half of the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200 and facing in the left-right direction. The upper left decorative substrate 872 is fitted into an edge member 214b that forms the left side of the transparent plate 214a facing in the vertical direction. The lower left decorative board 873 is located on the left side of the design board 230 (a member on which a character or the like symbolizing a game model is printed on a transparent resin board) arranged below the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. It is fitted into the interior of a substantially triangular decorative panel. The upper right decorative substrate 874 is fitted into an edge member 214b that forms the right side of the transparent plate 214a facing in the vertical direction. The lower right decorative board 875 is fitted inside a substantially triangular decorative panel located on the right side of the design plate 230. The lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 and the lower panel illumination 877 are disposed behind the design plate 230. The lower panel illumination lighting substrate 876 is composed of an inverter, and the lower panel illumination 877 is composed of a cold cathode tube, and illuminates the design plate 230 from behind.

[Control by peripheral control board 510]
The sub-control block shown in FIG. 51 is composed of a portion divided by a dotted line in FIG. 51, a door block portion connected to the peripheral relay board 123 shown in FIG. 52, and a bass speaker 221. Yes. When the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 510 in FIG. 52 receives various commands from the main control board 409, based on the various commands, the above-mentioned upper panel illumination LED board 595 and the backlight board (the first cylinder to the first cylinder). The left illuminator 217 </ b> A configured to output a lighting signal for illuminating the light emitting diodes of the three-time cylinder), or composed of the illuminant disposed on the upper left decorative substrate 872 and the illuminant disposed on the lower left decorative substrate 873 (To be described later), a gradation lighting signal (lighting) for gradation-lighting a right light emitter 217B (to be described later) composed of a light emitter disposed on the upper right decorative substrate 874 and a light emitter disposed on the lower right decorative substrate 875 One aspect of the lighting control data to be controlled) is output via the door decoration drive board 860 provided separately from the peripheral control board 510 disposed on the back face of the door-shaped front member 200, or the above-described It flops after being disposed on the decorative substrate 871 emitters 217C blinking signal for flashing (see below) (an aspect of the lighting control data for lighting control), and outputs via the door decorative driving substrate 860.

  The blinking signals to the left illuminator 217A and the right illuminator 217B and the gradation lighting signal to the upper illuminator 217C are output in synchronization with the clock signal S-CLK from the serial input / output port of the peripheral control MPU. Door decoration based on serial data S-DATA (corresponding to lighting control data) and mode signal S-MODE, latch signal S-LATCH and select signals SEL0 and SEL1 output from the parallel input / output port The drive substrate 860 outputs to the left light emitter 217A, the right light emitter 217B, and the upper light emitter 217C.

  The VDP of the liquid crystal control board connected to the peripheral control board 510 by the board-to-board connector reads out the image from the image ROM based on the control signal output from the peripheral control MPU and controls the display of the liquid crystal module 590. The liquid crystal module 590 includes a backlight (cold cathode tube) and is lit by a liquid crystal inverter substrate 592.

  The sound source IC of the peripheral control board 510 reads the sound information from the sound ROM based on the control signal output from the peripheral control MPU, and the bass speaker 221 connected via the peripheral relay board 123 and the door decoration drive board 860. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the L speaker 201a and the R speaker 201b of the door-type front member 200.

[Door decoration drive board 860]
Next, the door decoration drive substrate 860 will be described. FIG. 61 is a simple circuit diagram of the door decoration drive board. As shown in FIG. 61, the door decoration drive board 860 includes a select circuit 860a, a switch circuit 860b, and a drive circuit 860c. First, various signals input to the door decoration drive board 860 will be described. Subsequently, the select circuit 860a, the switch circuit 860b, and the drive circuit 860c will be described. In FIG. 61, illustration of DC +5 volts (V) that is a control voltage supplied to the select circuit 860a and the like and DC + 12V that is a drive voltage supplied to the left light emitter 217A and the like is omitted.

[Various signals input to the door decoration drive board 860]
As shown in FIG. 61, the door decoration drive board 860 is a peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 510.
Serial data S-DATA is input from the (serial input / output port) in synchronization with the clock signal S-CLK. In this embodiment, the clock signal S-CLK is set so that information of 250 kb (kilobits) can be output per second (s).

  The serial data S-DATA includes gradation lighting data for gradation lighting of the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B and blinking data for blinking the upper light emitter 217C, which are different in data format. The gradation lighting data is composed of gradation data and lighting data. Note that a plurality of these blinking data and gradation lighting data are separately stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 510 as a table, and the peripheral control MPU refers to those tables as needed to store one data. It is created as serial data S-DATA and output to the door decoration drive board 860.

  In addition to the clock signal S-CLK and serial data S-DATA, the door decoration drive board 860 includes select signals SEL0 and SEL1, a mode signal S-MODE and a latch signal S-LATCH from the peripheral control MPU (parallel input / output port). Is entered. The select signals SEL0 and SEL1 are signals for transmitting to the switch circuit 860b whether the serial data S-DATA output from the peripheral control MPU (serial input / output port) is blinking data or gradation lighting data. The signal S-MODE is a signal that tells the driving circuit 860c whether the gradation lighting data is gradation data or lighting data, and the latch signal S-LATCH is the serial data S-DATA captured by the driving circuit 860c. Based on the above, the fact that the output of the gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B is transmitted to the drive circuit 860c via the switch circuit 860b, or the blink signal is started to be output to the upper light emitter 217C. Is transmitted to the drive circuit 860c via the switch circuit 860b.

  As for the wiring between the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860, one end of a connector with a harness having connectors for connection (20 pins) at both ends is connected to the connector CN3 (20 pins) of the peripheral control board 510. As shown in FIG. 11, the other end 427 of the connector with the harness (426) is attached to the connector holder 428 (the above configuration is the game unit side), and the peripheral relay board 123 housed in the wiring relay member 113. Connector 125 (CN1, 20 pins in FIGS. 52 and 53) (outer body 100 side). As shown in FIG. 9, one end of a connector 920 with a harness having connectors (20 pins) for connection at both ends is connected to the connector CN2 (20 pins) of the peripheral relay board 123. The end is extended to the door-shaped front member 200 and connected to the connector CN1 (20 pins) of the door decoration drive board 860 (see reference numeral 859 in FIG. 60 and FIG. 52). Through these harnesses, the clock signal S-CLK, serial data S-DATA, select signals SEL0, SEL1, mode signal S-MODE and latch signal S-LATCH from the peripheral control MPU are transmitted to the door decoration drive board 860. It has become.

[Select circuit 860a]
As shown in FIG. 61, the select circuit 860a includes inverters IC1A and IC1B (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC14), and logical products IC2A and IC3A (in this embodiment, manufactured by Tokyo Shibaura Electric: TC74HC08). Configured.

  Each of the inverters IC1A and IC1B includes eight inverting circuits, and select signals SEL0 and SEL1 are input to two of them (IC1A and IC1B), respectively. The logical products IC2A and IC3A have four logical product circuits (the same applies to IC2B to IC2D and IC3B to IC3D described later). The select signal SEL0 input to the input terminal 1 of the inverter IC1A inverts the input logic, is output from the output terminal 2 as the inverted select signal SEL0 ', and is input to the input terminal 2 of the logical product IC2A. Since the select signal SEL1 is input to the input terminal 1 of the logical product IC2A and the logical product IC2A is a logical product circuit, the logical product of the input terminals 1 and 2 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 3 to the switch circuit. Is output to 860b.

  The select signal SEL1 input to the input terminal 3 of the inverter IC1B inverts the input logic, is output from the output terminal 4 as the inverted select signal SEL1 ′, and is input to the input terminal 2 of the logical product IC3A. Since the select signal SEL0 is input to the input terminal 1 of the logical product IC3A, and the logical product IC3A is a logical product circuit, the logical product of the input terminals 1 and 2 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 3 to the switch circuit. Is output to 860b.

[Switch circuit 860b]
As shown in FIG. 61, the switch circuit 860b to which the calculation results by the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input includes logical products IC2B to IC2D and IC3B to IC3D. Serial data S-DATA is input to the input terminals 4 of the logical products IC2B and IC3B, and the operation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input to the input terminal 5 of the logical products IC2B and IC3B. Since the logical products IC2B and IC3B are logical product circuits, the logical product of the input terminals 4 and 5 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 6 to the drive circuit 860c.

  In this way, depending on the calculation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a (when the output of IC2A is HI, the output of IC3A is LOW, and when the output of IC3A is HI, the output of IC2A is LOW), serial Whether data S-DATA is output from the output terminal 6 of the logical product IC2B to the drive circuit 860c or output from the output terminal 6 of the logical product IC3B to the drive circuit 860c is switched.

  When noise enters a harness (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860 and the selector signals SEL0 and SEL1 have the same logic, the logical product IC2A of the select circuit 860a, The serial data S-DATA is not output from the output terminal 6 of the logical product IC2B to the drive circuit 860c and output terminal of the logical product IC3B depending on the calculation result by the IC3A (because both the outputs of IC2A and IC3A are LOW). 6 is not output to the drive circuit 860c. This prevents the serial data S-DATA affected by noise from being output to the drive circuit 860c (prevents unintended serial data S-DATA from being output to the drive circuit 860c). Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the serial data S-DATA.

  The clock signal S-CLK is input to the input terminals 9 of the logical products IC2C and IC3C, and the operation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input to the input terminal 10 of the logical products IC2C and IC3C. Since the logical products IC2C and IC3C are logical product circuits, the logical product of the input terminals 9 and 10 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 8 to the drive circuit 800c.

  As described above, according to the calculation result by the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a (when the output of IC2A is HI, the output of IC3A is LOW, and when the output of IC3A is HI, the output of IC2A is LOW), the clock Whether the signal S-CLK is output from the output terminal 8 of the logical product IC2C to the drive circuit 860c or output from the output terminal 8 of the logical product IC3C to the drive circuit 860c is switched.

  When noise enters a harness (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860 and the selector signals SEL0 and SEL1 have the same logic, the logical product IC2A of the select circuit 860a, The clock signal S-CLK is not output from the output terminal 8 of the logical product IC2C to the drive circuit 800c and output terminal of the logical product IC3C depending on the calculation result by the IC3A (when the outputs of the IC2A and IC3A are both LOW). 8 is not output to the drive circuit 800c. As a result, the clock signal S-CLK affected by noise is not output to the drive circuit 860c. Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the clock signal S-CLK.

  The latch signal S-LATCH is input to the input terminals 12 of the logical products IC2D and IC3D, and the operation results of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a are input to the input terminal 13 of the logical products IC2D and IC3D. Since the logical products IC2D and IC3D are logical product circuits, the logical product of the input terminals 12 and 13 is obtained and the operation result is output from the output terminal 11 to the drive circuit 860c.

  In this way, depending on the calculation result of the logical products IC2A and IC3A of the select circuit 860a (when the output of IC2A is HI, the output of IC3A is LOW, and when the output of IC3A is HI, the output of IC2A is LOW), the latch The signal S-LATCH is switched between output from the output terminal 11 of the logical product IC2D to the drive circuit 800c or output from the output terminal 11 of the logical product IC3D to the drive circuit 800c.

  When noise enters a harness (not shown) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860 and the selector signals SEL0 and SEL1 have the same logic, the logical product IC2A of the select circuit 800a, The latch signal S-LATCH is not output from the output terminal 11 of the logical product IC2D to the drive circuit 860c and output terminal of the logical product IC3D depending on the calculation result by the IC3A (when the outputs of the IC2A and IC3A are both LOW). 11 is not output to the drive circuit 860c. As a result, the latch signal S-LATCH affected by noise is not output to the drive circuit 860c. Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the latch signal S-LATCH.

[Drive circuit 860c]
As shown in FIG. 61, the drive circuit 860c to which the operation results of the logical products IC2B to IC2D and IC3B to IC3D of the switch circuit 860b are input includes the blinking control IC4, the left gradation control IC5, and the right gradation control IC6. It is prepared for.

[Blinking control IC4]
In this embodiment, the blinking control IC 4 uses TB62709 manufactured by Shibaura Electric, Tokyo. The TB 62709 is a constant current driver and can directly drive a light emitting diode or the like. The operation result of the logical product IC3B of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the serial data S-DATA is input to the DATA-IN terminal of the blinking control IC4, and the operation of the logical product IC3C of the switch circuit 860b is input to the CLOCK terminal of the blinking control IC4. The result, that is, the clock signal S-CLK is input, and the calculation result of the logical product IC3D of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the latch signal S-LATCH is input to the LOAD terminal of the blinking control IC4. The serial data S-DATA fetched by the blinking control IC 4 is described later in detail, but the logic of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 is controlled to become blinking data.

  In this way, the blinking control IC 4 takes in the serial data S-DATA (flashing data), and when the latch signal S-LATCH is input, based on the taken-in serial data S-DATA (flashing data). The flashing signal is output from the OUT-a terminal to the OUT-g terminal to the upper light emitter 217C. This blinking signal is a constant current, and this constant current flows to the upper light emitter 217C, and the upper light emitter 217C is turned on or blinks.

[Left side gradation control IC 5 and right side gradation control IC 6]
In the present embodiment, the left-side gradation control IC 5 and the right-side gradation control IC 6 use TLC 5922 manufactured by Texas Instruments (TI). This TLC5922 has 16 channels of output, and each output channel can flow a programmable constant current in the range of 0 to 80 milliamperes (mA) in addition to individual ON / OFF control. Is set based on the MODE signal). In addition, a maximum output current can be set by one external resistor (not shown), and the output current can be output for each channel in 128 steps from 0 to 127 with respect to this maximum output current.

  The calculation result of the logical product IC2B of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the serial data S-DATA, is input to the SIN terminal of the left-side gradation control IC5, and is input to the SCLK terminals of the left-side gradation control IC5 and the right-side gradation control IC6. Is the operation result of the logical product IC2C of the switch circuit 860b, that is, the clock signal S-CLK, and the XLAT terminals of the left gradation control IC5 and the right gradation control IC6 are connected to the logical product IC2D of the switch circuit 860b. An operation result, that is, a latch signal S-LATCH is input. Further, the SOUT terminal of the left gradation control IC 5 and the SIN terminal of the right gradation control IC 6 are electrically connected, and the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 are daisy chain connected. Yes. As a result, the serial data S-DATA input to the SIN terminal of the left gradation control IC 5 is input from the SOUT terminal to the SIN terminal of the right gradation control IC 6, and the left gradation control IC 5 and right gradation control. The IC 6 can take in the serial data S-DATA. The mode signal S-MODE is input to the MODE terminals of the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6. The serial data S-DATA captured by the left-side gradation control IC 5 and the right-side gradation control IC 6 will be described in detail later, but controls the logic of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1, and controls gradation data and lighting. The gradation lighting data is composed of data.

  As described above, the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 take in the serial data S-DATA (gradation lighting data) and, when the latch signal S-LATCH is inputted, take it in as an opportunity. Based on the serial data S-DATA (gradation lighting data), the left gradation control IC 5 outputs a gradation lighting signal from its OUT0 to OUT15 terminals to the left light emitter 217A, and the right gradation control IC 6 A gradation lighting signal is output from the OUT0 terminal to OUT15 terminal to the right light emitter 217B. In the gradation lighting signal, a current of 0 to 127 steps with respect to the maximum output current based on the set gradation data flows to the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B, and the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B. Lights up or gradations.

[Output sequence of blinking data and gradation lighting data]
Next, an output sequence of serial data S-DATA output from the peripheral control MPU (serial input / output port) of the peripheral control board 510 described above will be described. As described above, the serial data S-DATA is composed of blinking data and gradation data, and a plurality of serial data S-DATA are stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 510 as a table. The peripheral control MPU creates these as serial data S-DATA with reference to those tables as necessary, and outputs them to the door decoration drive board 860.

  FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing an example of an output sequence of serial data. As shown in FIG. 62, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 510 outputs the select signal SEL0 from the parallel input / output port with the logic HI and outputs the select signal SEL1 with the logic LOW (timing T0). By setting the logic of the select signal SEL0 to HI and the logic of the select signal SEL1 to LOW, the door decoration drive board 860 is informed that the serial data S-DATA is blinking data.

  After the timing T0, the blinking data output sequence is started (timing T1), and the blinking data, which is the serial data S-DATA, is synchronized with the clock signal S-CLK from the serial input / output port to the door decoration drive board 860. 61, and the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH is output LOW from the parallel input / output port, whereby the blinking control IC 4 of the door decoration drive board 860 shown in FIG. 61 takes in the blinking data. After that, when all the blinking data is output from the serial input / output port, the blinking control IC 4 takes in the latch signal S-LATCH as an opportunity by outputting the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH from the parallel input / output port to HI. Based on the blink data, a blink signal is output to the upper light emitter 217C, and the upper light emitter 217C is lit or blinks.

  After the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH is set to HI from the parallel input / output port, the logic of the select signal SEL1 is output from LOW to HI from the parallel input / output port (timing T2). This completes the blinking data output sequence.

  After timing T2, the logic of the select signal SEL0 is output from the parallel input / output port from HI to LOW, and the output sequence of gradation lighting data is started (timing T3). By setting the logic of the select signal SEL0 to LOW and the logic of the select signal SEL1 to HI, the door decoration drive board 860 is informed that the serial data S-DAT is gradation data.

  After timing T3, the grayscale data as serial data S-DATA is output to the door decoration drive board 860 bit by bit from the serial input / output port in synchronization with the clock signal S-CLK, and the latch signal S is output from the parallel input / output port. When the logic of -LATCH is set to LOW and output, the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 of the door decoration drive substrate 860 shown in FIG. 61 capture gradation lighting data. At this time, since the logic of the mode signal S-MODE is HI, the left-side gradation control IC 5 and the right-side gradation control IC 6 capture gradation data among gradation lighting data.

  When all the gradation data is output from the serial input / output port, although not shown, the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH is output from LOW to HI from the parallel input / output port, and then the latch signal S- The logic of LATCH is changed from HI to LOW and output. Then, the logic of the mode signal S-MODE is changed from HI to LOW from the parallel input / output port. At this time, since the logic of the mode signal S-MODE is LOW, the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 take in the lighting data among the gradation lighting data. When all the lighting data among the gradation lighting data is output from the serial input / output port, the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH and the mode signal S-MODE is changed from LOW to HI from the parallel input / output port, thereby controlling the gradation for the left side. The IC5 and the right gradation control IC 6 output the gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A based on the gradation data captured with the latch signal S-LATCH as a trigger, and the right floor The tone control IC 6 outputs a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B, and the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B are lighted or gradation lighted.

  After the logic of the latch signal S-LATCH and the mode signal S-MODE is set to HI from the parallel input / output port, the logic of the select signal SEL1 is output from the HI to LOW from the parallel input / output port (timing T4). Thus, the gradation lighting data output sequence is completed.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above includes the peripheral control board 510 and the door decoration drive board 860. The peripheral control board 510 mounts a peripheral control MPU which is a microprocessor with a built-in serial input / output port and parallel input / output port. The door decoration drive board 860 is provided separately from the peripheral control board 510, and outputs a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C based on the serial data S-DATA output from the serial input / output port of the peripheral control MPU. Then, a gradation lighting signal is output to the left light emitter 217A and the right light emitter 217B.

  The door decoration drive substrate 860 includes a blinking control IC 4, a left gradation control IC 5, a right gradation control IC 6, and a selection circuit 860a. The blinking control IC 4 takes in blinking data of the serial data S-DATA and outputs a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C. The left gradation control IC 5 takes in the gradation lighting data of the serial data S-DATA and outputs a gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A. The right gradation control IC 6 takes in gradation lighting data of the serial data S-DATA and outputs a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B. The select circuit 860a outputs the serial data S-DATA to the blinking control IC 4 based on the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 output from the parallel input / output ports of the peripheral control MPU, or the left gradation control IC 5 and the right side. To output to the gray scale control IC 6.

  The serial data S-DATA is composed of blinking data of the blinking control IC 4 and gradation lighting data of the left gradation control IC 5 and right gradation control IC 6. Is different.

  As described above, the serial data S-DATA is composed of the blink data of the blink control IC 4 and the gradation lighting data of the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 which have different data formats. The select circuit 860a switches whether the serial data S-DATA is output to the blinking control IC 4 or to the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6. Therefore, even if the blinking control IC 4, the left-side gradation control IC 5, and the right-side gradation control IC 6 having different formats of the serial data S-DATA to be taken in can be handled as one serial data S-DATA.

  The blinking control IC 4 captures the blinking data and outputs a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C. The left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 capture gradation data composed of gradation data and lighting data. The left gradation control IC 5 outputs a gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A, and the right gradation control IC 6 outputs a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B.

  The serial data S-DATA is composed of flashing data and gradation lighting data having different formats, and the select circuit 860a receives two select signals SEL0 and SEL1 from the parallel input / output port of the peripheral control MPU. When the logic of the select signal SEL0 is HI and the logic of the select signal SEL1 is LOW, the blinking data is output to the blinking control IC 4, while the logic of the select signal SEL0 is LOW and the select signal SEL1 When is HI, the gradation lighting data is output to the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6.

  In this manner, the single serial data S-DATA, the blinking data to the blinking control IC 4, the gradation lighting data to the gradation control IC for the left side and the gradation control IC for the right side, and the select signal input to the selection circuit 860a. It can be output by SEL0 and SEL1. Accordingly, the blinking control IC 4 can output a blinking signal to the upper light emitter 217C based on the fetched blinking data, and the left gradation control IC 5 and the right gradation control IC 6 are based on the fetched gradation lighting data. Thus, the left gradation control IC 5 can output a gradation lighting signal to the left light emitter 217A, and the right gradation control IC 6 can output a gradation lighting signal to the right light emitter 217B.

  Further, when the logics of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 input to the select circuit 860a are both HI or LOW, that is, when they are the same logic, the blinking control IC4, the left gradation control IC5 and the right floor are controlled by the switch circuit 860b. The serial data S-DATA, the clock signal S-CLK, and the latch signal S-LATCH are not output to the adjustment control IC 6. When noise enters the select signals SEL0 and SEL1, the logic becomes the same (same logic). Using this property, when the logic of the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 input to the select circuit 860a becomes the same logic, the switch circuit 860b converts the serial data S-DATA affected by noise into the blinking control IC 4 and the left side. No output is made to the tone control IC 5 and the tone control IC 6 for the right side. Thus, the select signals SEL0 and SEL1 also serve as noise countermeasures for the serial data S-DATA.

  As described above, when the gaming unit is attached to and detached from the opening 109 of the outer main body 100, the connector holder 428 is detachably coupled to the wiring relay member 113, so that the connector 425 (main control) of the connector holder 428 is attached. System wiring connector) and connector 124 (main relay connector) of main relay board 122 are detachably connected, and connector 427 (peripheral control system wiring connector) of connector holder 428 and peripheral relay are connected. Since the connector 125 (peripheral relay connector) of the board 123 is detachably connected, only two connectors are required for connection, so the number of connectors used for connection can be reduced, and when changing models , Separation / combination of game units as a model-dependent part of the model-independent body part It can be carried out easily.

  Since the lighting control data is output as serial data from the serial output port of the microprocessor (peripheral control MPU) of the peripheral control board 510 and transmitted to the drive circuit 860c of the door decoration drive board 860 by serial communication, the peripheral relay The number of harnesses from the board 123 to the door decoration drive board 860 can be reduced (result of being able to use one signal line for transmitting lighting control data as one of S-DATA), and a door-shaped front member The number of harnesses in the bent portion near the hinge attached to the front side of the outer body 100 so that the 200 can rotate is reduced, and the harness is sandwiched between the door-shaped front member 200 and the outer body 100. The fear can be kept low (the trouble of damaging the harness can be drastically reduced), and the reliability is improved.

  The example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1 has been described above. In a game by the slot machine 1 having such a configuration, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the effective line, which will be described later. And a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded as necessary.

  Hereinafter, the structure and control for realizing the game playability performed by the slot machine 1 in a more characteristic manner will be described in more detail.

[Design of each reel, design row]
Each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a symbol row (sequence numbers 1 to 14) configured by arranging a plurality of types (any one of a total of 9 types in this figure) at regular intervals. Reel bands (design bands) 351a, 351b, 351c on which a total of 14 symbols shown in FIG. FIG. 63 shows a state in which the symbol rows described on the reel bands 351a, 351b, and 351c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience.

  In each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols has openings 591a (also referred to as symbol display windows, hereinafter symbols). It is arranged so as to be visible via a display window 591a (see FIG. 64 described next).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the types of symbols include “red 7” symbols (hereinafter referred to as red 7 symbols, which correspond to the three arrangement numbers of reel bands 351a, 351b, and 351c), “ “Blue 7” symbol (hereinafter referred to as Blue 7 symbol, corresponding to reel band 351c, array number 6) and “White 7” symbol (hereinafter referred to as white 7 symbol, corresponding to array number 9, reel band 351c) ), Which are larger than other designs. The “Red 7” symbol is painted in red on the inside, the “Blue 7” symbol is painted in blue on the inside, and “White 7” is painted white on the inside. Thus, since the red 7 symbol, the blue 7 symbol, and the white 7 symbol are given larger and relatively conspicuous colors than the other symbols, it is easier to visually recognize than the other symbols.

  In addition, a symbol in the shape of “Iris” (hereinafter referred to as “Iris design”, for example, the arrangement number 1 of the reel band 351a, etc.), a symbol in the shape of “Kiri” (hereinafter referred to as “Kiri design”, for example, reel The pattern having the shape of “willow” (hereinafter referred to as willow pattern, for example, the sequence number of 5 of the reel band 351a, etc.) and the pattern having shape of “ume” Ume design, for example, reel band 351a, arrangement number 6 or the like, “Momiji” design (hereinafter referred to as maple design, for example, reel band 351a, arrangement number 11), “pine” (Hereinafter referred to as a pine symbol, for example, the arrangement number 2 of the reel band 351b, etc.), and a symbol shaped “Kiku” (hereinafter referred to as a sterling symbol, for example, the arrangement number of the reel band 351c). 2)

  As described above, there are a total of 10 types of symbols on the reel bands 351a, 351b, and 351c. The reel band 351a has 6 types (iris, drill, red 7, willow, ume, maple), the reel band 351b has 4 types (cut, pine, red 7, ume), and the reel band 351c has 8 types ( (Kiri, Chrysanthemum, Red 7, Willow, Blue 7, White 7, Maple, Ume).

[Effective line]
FIG. 64 shows the decorative member 591 partially enlarged around the symbol display window 591a. From the symbol display window 591a, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where the symbols are displayed are referred to as “upper (or upper)”, “middle (or middle)” and “lower (or lower)” from the top.

  From the above, it is possible to display “number of stages × number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 591a. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 591a from “number of stages (3) × number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the right portion (right side as viewed from the symbol display window 591a) of the decorative member 591 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be unified as the display panel 591 in the following), of which “BET1”, “ BET lamps (BET lamps) 614 are labeled “BET2” and “BET3”. The numbers of the BET lamps (numbers 1, 2 and 3 of the above-mentioned “BET 1”, “BET 2”, “BET 3”) are the numbers of bets (the numbers corresponding to the number of multiplied medals). It corresponds. In other words, “1” is 1 bet (the number of medals multiplied is 1), “2” is 2 bets (the number of medals multiplied is 2), and “3” is 3 bets (also called a MAX bet). The number of medals is 3).

  An arrangement (straight line type) that is valid according to the number of bets is determined in advance. This “effective arrangement” is also called an effective line. The following is unified with the active line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 591a, if the respective symbols are not arranged on one active line, the predetermined winning combination It is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to is displayed. In such a case, it is determined that a disparate combination pattern is displayed.

  Next, general items regarding the number of active lines corresponding to the number of bets and the number of active lines will be described. The effective line corresponding to one bet is only one effective line 621 (middle stage line 621) arranged in a "middle stage-middle stage-middle stage" connecting the middle positions of the reels. This is called “1 BET line”.

  In the case of 2-bet, in addition to the above-described 1 BET line, an effective line 622a (upper line 622a) arranged in an "upper stage-upper stage-upper stage" connecting the upper stage positions of the reels and a lower stage position of each reel are connected. Two effective lines, the effective line 622b (lower line 622b) arranged in the order of “lower stage-lower stage-lower stage”, are newly added. The two effective lines of the upper line and the lower line are collectively referred to as “2 BET line”. Therefore, in the case of 2 bets, there are a total of 3 active lines.

  In the case of 3 bets, in addition to the 1BET line and 2BET line described above, the lower right row is connected to the upper position of the left reel, the middle position of the middle reel, and the lower position of the right reel. The line 623b (downwardly right line 623b) and the effective line 623a (right side) of “lower stage—middle stage—upper stage” connecting the lower stage position of the left reel, the middle stage position of the middle reel, and the upper stage position of the right reel are “lower stage—middle stage—upper stage”. Two effective lines of the rising line 623a) are newly added. The two effective lines of the right-up line and the right-down line are collectively referred to as “3BET line”. Therefore, in the case of 3 bets, there are a total of 5 active lines.

  The above is an explanation of an effective line of a spinning-reel game machine represented by a general slot machine, but the effective line is not limited to the linear type as described above. Furthermore, it is not restricted to the aspect which increases the corresponding effective line whenever the number of bets increases as mentioned above. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a game for the first time by inserting three cards. In this case, the effective line is one active line in a sequence of “middle stage-middle stage-middle stage”. 621 (middle line 621).

[Game state display section]
In addition, the display panel 591 is provided with indicators such as lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or blinked) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1. And the area | region where these indicators are arrange | positioned comprises the game state display part for a player to grasp | ascertain the various states regarding the slot machine 1. FIG. Note that the lighting (or blinking) control of various indicators in the gaming status display unit is executed by the gaming status display board 450 described above.

  In the game state display portion, from the upper side in FIG. 64, an error lamp 604 with characters “ERR” drawn, a stop lamp 605 with characters “OFF” drawn, and the BET lamp 614 are located immediately below. A replay lamp 606 with the letters “REP”, a start lamp 608 with the letters “STR”, a medal IN lamp 610 with the letters “INS”, and two horizontal 7-segment LEDs. Each provided payout number display LED 612 is provided. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the cumulative payout number of medals in a bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. Also good.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or flashes) when any trouble or failure occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and indicates that a trouble or the like is currently occurring. Have a role to inform.

  The stop lamp 605 is configured such that when the stop switch described above is set to ON and the player enters a stop state in which a medal is not accepted after the bonus game is over, It also has a role to inform the staff in charge).

  The replay lamp 606 has a role of notifying the player that a game can be replayed (a game can be played again without a new medal) when the game result is a replay (described later).

  The start lamp 608 starts to light (or flash) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of prompting the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation).

  The medal IN lamp 610 continues to light (or blink) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet), thereby having a role of prompting the player to place a bet.

  The payout number display LED 612 has a role of notifying the player of the number of medals paid out by displaying the number of payouts (number of medals to be paid out) when there is a payout of medals accompanying the game result.

[Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, the winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 shows a combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination of the slot machine 1 and its benefits (the number of payouts, etc., hereinafter referred to as a game privilege). The symbol combinations and the number of payouts in FIG. 65 may be written on the display panel 591 or the like as a payout table for the player (a simple description of the gaming benefits of each winning combination).

  As described above, the reels 351a, 351b, and 351c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively. The order of symbols, the types of symbols, etc. are different for each reel band. For example, a combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is displayed in the symbol display window 591a. There is nothing. In addition, as long as the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is not displayed in the symbol display window 591a, the order of symbols and the types of symbols of several reel bands may be the same.

  Whether or not a symbol combination mode corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed from display contents (a symbol combination mode) displayed in the symbol display window 591a when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. Is judged. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the above-described active lines in the symbol display window 591a. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is one active line (one line) (the combination mode of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is not displayed in the symbol display window 591a).

  In the following, the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is indicated by the fact that the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on one active line in a sequence of “middle stage-middle stage-middle stage”. Is called a winning combination symbol) or a winning combination symbol is aligned.

  The slot machine 1 has the following symbols: “Red 7”, “Blue 7”, “White 7”, “Ayame”, “Kiri”, “Yanagi”, “Momiji”, “Ume” As mentioned above, there are “pine design” and “chrysanthemum design”, among which “red 7 design”, “blue 7 design” and “white 7 design” are compared to other designs. The design is easy to stand out and easy to identify. Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. Among these, there is only one “red 7 symbol” on each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, and in addition, the color is easier to visually recognize than red and other symbols. The “blue 7 symbol” and “white 7 symbol” are only in the right reel 301c, and the number is one each. In addition, since the color is blue or white, it is easier to visually recognize than other designs. These symbols are easy for a player to make a target symbol because of the color and the size of the symbol even while the reel is rotating.

  Also, “Iris design”, “Kiri design”, “willow design”, “Momiji design”, “Ume design”, “Pine design”, “Kiku design” (that is, a design that is not part of the bonus design) Compared with “red 7 symbol”, “blue 7 symbol”, and “white 7 symbol”, the symbol is composed of inconspicuous shades. By making “Red 7 Symbol”, “Blue 7 Symbol”, and “White 7 Symbol” stand out from these symbols, “Red 7 Symbol”, “Blue 7 Symbol”, and “White 7 Symbol” are aimed at. It is easy to do.

  In order to align the bonus symbols, it is always necessary to have an eye-opening. However, by making the bonus symbols as described above, it is possible to make it as easy as possible even for low-game players (beginners). It has become.

  In addition, these symbols are merely symbolic symbols by themselves, but become a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. Hereinafter, combinations of predetermined symbols corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 65 will be described.

[Big Bonus (BB)]
As shown in FIG. 65, the winning combination indicated as BB is a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as BB). In this BB, “red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol” is determined in advance as a combination mode of the corresponding symbol (BB symbol). In other words, when BB is won and all the combinations of symbols consisting of “red 7 symbols” are aligned on one effective line of the “middle stage-middle stage-middle stage”, the BB symbols are aligned. Note that winning BB means that the BB flag is internally established and the BB symbols are aligned on the active line, and this may be referred to as “BB condition device has been activated”.

  When the BB symbols are aligned, a gaming bonus called a big bonus game (hereinafter referred to as BB game) is given. This BB game is concentrated on a plurality of games where it is easy to obtain medals, and is continuously executed until a prescribed number of medals (for example, 400) are paid out as a prize. When the paid-out medals reach the prescribed number (or may exceed the prescribed number), the BB game ends.

  Further, in this slot machine 1, medals are not awarded when the BB symbols are aligned (the game with the BB symbols aligned). That is, having the BB symbols together serves as an opportunity to move to the BB game. Further, since only one BB symbol is arranged on each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (see FIG. 63), the BB symbol is accurately aimed in the symbol display window 591a (the controllable range to be pulled in later). BB symbols cannot be aligned unless a stop operation (operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is performed. As described above, the stop operation aiming at the target symbol (in this example, the BB symbol), that is, “to push”, means that the skill (or technology or player in the slot machine 1 represented by the slot machine 1 is This is one of the operations that must be performed intentionally).

  Further, when the BB game is finished, the game state is not changed to the normal game state, but the state is changed to a special state by control described later. The special state means an art state (replay time) in which the replay winning probability is controlled to be higher than that in the normal game state. Details of the RT game will be described later.

[Regular Bonus (RB)]
Next, the winning combination indicated as RB includes RB1 and RB2, which are referred to as a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). When RB1 or RB2 is selected, the combination pattern of “red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-white 7 symbol” (RB1 described later) or “red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-blue 7 symbol” (RB2 described later) Align on the active line. Winning RB1 means that the flag of RB1 has been established internally, meaning that the symbols of RB1 have been aligned on the active line, and this is referred to as “the RB1 condition device has been activated” (The same applies to RB2).

  The RB game is RB1 when winning the “red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-white 7 symbol”, and RB2 when winning the “red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-blue 7 symbol”. However, in the following, when “RB” is simply referred to, it means both RB1 and RB2.

  When the RB1 symbols are aligned, a gaming bonus called a regular bonus game (hereinafter referred to as RB1 game) is awarded. This RB game is performed in a concentrated manner, with multiple games that make it easy to obtain medals, and continues to run until a prescribed number of medals (for example, 120) are paid out compared to when the BB game is executed. Is done. When the paid-out medals reach the prescribed number (or may exceed the prescribed number), the RB1 game ends. It should be noted that the RB1 game may be ended when the specified number of games is continued (for example, 8 times) and reached, or the specified number of games is reached. The RB1 game may be ended when any one of the conditions is reached. Whether the RB1 game has reached a specified number of games (for example, 12 times) or whether the specified number of winnings has been reached during the RB1 game period (for example, winning any of the winning roles 8 times) The RB1 game may be ended when any of the conditions is satisfied.

  Even when the RB1 symbols are arranged, medals are not given in the game, and only a role as an opportunity to shift to the RB1 game. In addition, each symbol constituting the RB1 symbol (red 7 symbol, white 7 symbol, blue 7 symbol) is also arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, as in the case of the BB symbol. 63), the pattern needs to be pressed.

  Further, when the RB1 game is finished, the game state is not changed to the normal game state, but is shifted to the special state by the control described later. The special state means a replay time (RT) in which the winning probability of replay is controlled to be higher than that in the normal game state. Details of the RT game will be described later.

  When the RB2 symbols are aligned, a gaming bonus called a regular bonus game (hereinafter referred to as RB2 game) is awarded. This RB game is performed in a concentrated manner, with multiple games that make it easy to obtain medals, and continues to run until a prescribed number of medals (for example, 120) are paid out compared to when the BB game is executed. Is done. When the paid-out medals reach the specified number (or may exceed the specified number), the RB2 game ends. It should be noted that the RB2 game may be terminated when the prescribed number of games is continued (for example, eight times) and this prescribed number of games is reached, or the prescribed number of games is reached. The RB2 game may be ended when any one of the conditions is reached. Whether the RB2 game has reached a specified number of games (for example, 12 times) or whether the specified number of winnings has been reached during the RB2 game period (for example, winning any of the winning roles 8 times) The RB2 game may be ended when any of the conditions is satisfied.

  Even when the RB2 symbols are arranged, medals are not given in the game, and only a role as an opportunity to shift to the RB2 game. Also, each symbol constituting the RB2 symbol (red 7 symbol, white 7 symbol, blue 7 symbol) is arranged only one on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c as in the case of the BB symbol ( 63), the pattern needs to be pressed.

  Furthermore, when the RB2 game is finished, the game state is not changed to the normal game state, but is shifted to the special state by the control described later. The special state means a replay time (RT) in which the winning probability of replay is controlled to be higher than that in the normal game state. Details of the RT game will be described later.

  Thus, in the slot machine 1, there is an opportunity for the player to concentrate and acquire medals through the three bonus games of the BB game, the RB1 game, and the RB2 game. However, only the BB game allows the player to win a large number of medals. In the slot machine 1, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game (for example, 15) is determined in advance, and the number of medals to be paid out as a single game result does not exceed this maximum number. It has become. Therefore, although the number of medals that can be acquired from the start to the end of the RB game is larger than the maximum number (15) that can be acquired in one game, the BB game starts. Compared to the number of medals that can be acquired from the end of the game to the end, it is considerably smaller (about 1/4).

[Replay time (RT)]
In the slot machine 1, an RT (replay time) game is started when a predetermined condition is established. Here, the RT game is a state in which a state where the winning probability of replay is easier to win than the normal game is continued for a predetermined number of games (game period). In other words, in replay time, it means the state of winning mainly replay (re-gamer) in the internal lottery, and in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state, there is a high probability of winning mainly losing, whereas in the replay time In the internal lottery, the probability of winning a replay is preferably 50% or more. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a total of six RT games, a first RT game, a second RT game, a third RT game, a fourth RT game, a fifth RT game, and a sixth RT game, which have different winning probabilities such as replays as RT games. have. The start conditions and end conditions of these six types of RT games are different (not shown).

  The RT game in the present embodiment is any one of the first RT game to the sixth RT game.

[First RT game]
The start condition of the first RT game is the replay 0 ("Iris design-Kiri design-Kiku design" replay design, which is the start condition of the first RT game, during the operation of the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game. When the RT game is won or the RT game is not in operation during normal play. Also, the first RT game end condition is that when a later-described fifth RT game start condition is satisfied (when the BB flag is satisfied), when the sixth RT game start condition is satisfied (when the RB flag is satisfied) ), Or when 3G is digested.

[Second RT game]
The second RT game is a gaming privilege that is always granted when the BB bonus game ends. In other words, the end of the BB game is the start condition for the second RT game. On the other hand, the end condition of the second RT game is that when the start condition of the first RT game is satisfied (when replay 0 is won), when the start condition of the fifth RT game described later is satisfied (the condition device of BB is When the 6RT game start condition is met (when the RB condition device is activated) or when 5000G is consumed. The second RT game is also ended when a specific replay (replay 0) is won before reaching 5000G.

  The end of the second RT game, 5000G digestion, does not mean that the second RT game does not end until 5000G is digested. Although details will be described later, depending on the stop mode of the reel stop button by the player, there is a case where a re-game 0 is won before the game is completed. Winning replay 0 means satisfying the start condition of the first RT game and the end condition of the second RT game at the same time as described above. In other words, the second RT game can be ended by entering the first RT game before digesting 5000G.

  In other words, the second RT game will continue until 5000G is consumed, unless a replay 0 is won. Whether or not to win the replay 0 is determined at least by the stop operation of the reel stop button that stops first (details will be described later), so for the player, from which reel stop button until the replay 0 is won The game can be advanced while stopping or throbbing.

  Also, the effect mode during the second RT game may be an effect mode (normal mode) during the normal game, or a special effect mode different from the normal mode. For example, there may be a case where the mode after the BB game ends is the same production mode as the normal state. In this case, for the player, although the production mode is the same as the normal state, the predetermined number of games Since a state advantageous to the player continues for a long time, it is difficult to end the game immediately after the end of the BB game, and the operating rate is improved.

  Although the second RT game is a game mode that is more advantageous than the normal mode, when the game mode is different from the state in which a privilege effect (game generally referred to as ART) described later is being performed, It is difficult for the player to predict whether or not the replay 0 will be won. Therefore, even if a state advantageous to the player continues for several games, a certain amount of medals is not obtained at a time unlike the bonus game, so there is no excessive loss for the hole. This makes it possible to achieve a balance between the player and the hall.

[3rd RT game]
The third RT game is a gaming privilege that is always granted when the RB1 bonus game ends. In other words, the end of the RB1 game is the start condition for the third RT game. The third RT game is terminated when the first RT game start condition is satisfied (when replay 0 is won), or when the fifth RT game start condition described later is satisfied (BB condition device is activated). When the start condition of the sixth RT game is satisfied (when the RB condition device is activated), or when 5000G is consumed. The third RT game is also ended when a specific replay (replay 0) is won before reaching 5000G.

  Note that the above-mentioned condition for ending the third RT game, 5000G digestion, does not mean that the third RT game does not end until 5000G is digested. Although details will be described later, depending on the stop mode of the reel stop button by the player, there is a case where a re-game 0 is won before the game is completed. Winning replay 0 means satisfying the start condition of the first RT game and the end condition of the third RT game as described above. In other words, the third RT game may end by entering the first RT game before digesting 5000G.

  In other words, the third RT game will continue until 5000G is consumed, unless replay 0 is won. Whether or not to win the replay 0 is determined at least by the stop operation of the reel stop button that stops first (details will be described later), so for the player, from which reel stop button until the replay 0 is won The game can be advanced while stopping or throbbing.

  Also, the effect mode during the third RT game may be an effect mode (normal mode) during the normal game, or a special effect mode different from the normal mode. For example, there may be a case where the mode after the RB1 game is the same production mode as the normal state. In this case, for the player, although the production mode is the same as the normal state, the predetermined number of games Since a state advantageous to the player continues for a long time, it is difficult to end the game immediately after the RB1 game ends, and the operating rate improves.

  Although the third RT game is a game mode that is more advantageous than the normal mode, if the game mode is different from the state where the bonus effect described below is performed, the player determines when the re-game 0 is won. Is difficult to predict. Therefore, even if a state advantageous to the player continues for several games, a certain amount of medals is not obtained at a time unlike the bonus game, so there is no excessive loss for the hole. This makes it possible to achieve a balance between the player and the hall.

[4th RT game]
The fourth RT game is a gaming privilege that is always granted when the RB2 bonus game ends. In other words, the end of the RB1 game is the start condition for the fourth RT game. The fourth RT game is terminated when the first RT game start condition is satisfied (when replay 0 is won), or when the fifth RT game start condition described later is satisfied (BB condition device is activated). When the start condition of the sixth RT game is satisfied (when the RB condition device is activated), or when 5000G is consumed. The fourth RT game is also ended when a specific replay is won before reaching 5000G.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned end condition of the fourth RT game, 5000G digestion, does not mean that the fourth RT game does not end until 5000G is digested. Although details will be described later, depending on the stop mode of the reel stop button by the player, there is a case where a re-game 0 is won before the game is completed. To win the replay 0 means that the start condition of the first RT game is satisfied as described above, and the end condition of the fourth RT game is simultaneously satisfied. In other words, the 4th RT game can be ended by entering the first RT game before digesting 5000G.

  In other words, the fourth RT game will continue until 5000G is consumed unless replay 0 is won. Whether or not to win the replay 0 is determined at least by the stop operation of the reel stop button that stops first (details will be described later), so for the player, from which reel stop button until the replay 0 is won The game can be advanced while stopping or throbbing.

  Further, the effect mode during the fourth RT game may be an effect mode (normal mode) during the normal game, or a special effect mode different from the normal mode. For example, there may be a case where the mode after the RB2 game is the same as the normal state. In this case, for the player, the predetermined number of games is played even though the direction is the same as the normal state. Since the state advantageous to the player continues, it is difficult to end the game immediately after the RB2 game ends, and the operating rate is improved.

  Although the fourth RT game is a game mode that is more advantageous than the normal mode, when the game mode is different from the state where the bonus effect described below is performed, the player determines when the re-game 0 is won. Is difficult to predict. Therefore, even if a state advantageous to the player continues for several games, a certain amount of medals is not obtained at a time unlike the bonus game, so there is no excessive loss for the hole. This makes it possible to achieve a balance between the player and the hall.

[5th RT game]
The start condition for the fifth RT game is when the condition device for the BB game is activated (the BB flag is established). In other words, when the BB is won internally during the first RT game, the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game, the fifth RT game is entered. On the other hand, the end condition of the fifth RT game is when BB is activated. In other words, “Red 7 design-Red 7 design-Red 7 design”, which is the symbol corresponding to BB, is aligned with the “middle stage-middle stage-middle stage” which is the active line by the player's pressing operation. When the game is played, the fifth RT game ends.

[6th RT game]
The start condition for the sixth RT game is when the condition device for the RB game is activated (the RB flag is established). In other words, during the first RT game, the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game, the player enters the sixth RT game when RB is won internally. On the other hand, the end condition of the sixth RT game is when the RB is activated. In other words, by the player's pressing operation, the symbol corresponding to RB (RB symbol) is "Red 7 symbol-Red 7 symbol-Blue 7 symbol" or "Red 7 symbol-Red 7 symbol-White 7 symbol". The sixth RT game is finished when it is aligned with the “middle stage-middle stage-middle stage” which is the active line.

  Here, among the various RT games, in the state of the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game, the probability that the replay 0 that is the start condition of the first RT game is “winning alone” is zero. In other words, during the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game, the replay 0 is always won in duplicate with the replays 1-6. This is because the RT (second RT game, third RT game, or fourth RT game) is the first RT game when the start condition of the fifth RT game or the sixth RT game is satisfied (that is, the BB or RB flag is satisfied), or However, since the first RT game does not enter unless the player performs a reel stop operation, which will be described later, and wins replay 0, the above RT (second RT game, This is because the third RT game or the fourth RT game) continues until 5000 G is consumed unless the start condition for the first RT game is satisfied.

  Among the above RT games, in the second RT game after the end of the BB, the third RT game after the end of the RB1, or the fourth RT game after the end of the RB2, a special effect is performed during the RT game by special control described later. There is. This can be performed between the start of each RT game (the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game) and the digestion of 5000G. And during the bonus production, if the player wins the replay 0 (“Iris design-Kiri design-Kiku design”), which is the start condition of the first RT game, the second RT will not be exhausted. When the game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game is ended and the first RT game is started, the bonus effect is also ended simultaneously with the end of the RT game.

[Replay]
As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, seven types of replays (replay 0, replay 2, replay 3, replay 4, replay 5, replay 6) are provided, and the corresponding symbols are provided. As a combination mode, the replay 0 is “Ayame design-Kiri design-Kiku design”, the replay 1 is “Ayame design-Pine design-Kiri design”, and the replay 2 is “Ayame design-Pine design-Yanagi design”. Game 3 is “Ayame design-Pine design-Momiji design”, Re-play 4 is “Ume design-Pine design-Kiri design”, Re-play 5 is “Ayame design-Ume design-Kiri design”, and Re-play 6 is “Ayame design” The “design-pine design-ume design” is determined in advance.

  When various replay symbols are arranged, a game privilege called a replay game is given. In this replay game, a game to be played as the next game can be executed as a replay without inserting medals or betting again (being automatically bet).

  Here, when the symbols of replay 1 to replay 6 are prepared, even if a replay game is performed, the subsequent game state is not changed, and all the processes from the lottery processing to the granting of the privilege are performed in one game. Complete. On the other hand, after the replay game is performed with the symbols of replay 0, the game moves to the first RT game (details will be described later). As described above, the seven types of replays (replay 0 to replay 6) are similar in that the next game can be executed as a replay, but exist in terms of whether or not to move to the first RT game thereafter. Significance is different.

  In the present specification, “winning” means that the lottery is won, and the winning combination symbols are aligned on the active line on the condition that the lottery is won. However, if the above-described “promotion” fails, even if the lottery is won, the winning symbol may not be aligned on the active line.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since seven types (replay 0 to replay 6) are provided for “replay” as the winning category, hereinafter, when “replay” is simply referred to, replay 0 to all of replay 6 shall be pointed out.

  Thus, when the replay symbols are arranged, no medal is given, and a role of giving a privilege such as a replay game is given. A feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to consume a new medal (bet operation) in the next game instead of not paying out a medal. In addition, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, it can be said that, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency increases, there is very little disadvantage to the hole. Thereby, it is possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) within a certain range. That is, by providing a winning combination of replay, it is possible to have a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption during the game progress.

  Here, when the re-game 0 symbol is prepared, not only the replay game is given, but also when the re-game 0 symbol as a winning combination is prepared (when the re-game 0 is won), the gaming state is If the game is a 2RT game to a fourth RT game, the second RT game to the fourth RT game are terminated, and then the process proceeds to the first RT game.

  Note that during the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game, the replay 0 is always won in duplicate with the games 1 to 6. In addition, there is a possibility that the replay 0 may win alone when the RT is not operating, during the first RT game, during the fifth RT game, or during the sixth RT game. This is because the RT (second RT game, third RT game, or fourth RT game) is the first RT game when the start condition of the fifth RT game or the sixth RT game is satisfied (that is, the BB or RB flag is satisfied), or However, since the first RT game does not enter unless the player performs a reel stop operation, which will be described later, and wins replay 0, the above RT (second RT game, This is because the third RT game or the fourth RT game) continues until 5000 G is consumed unless the start condition for the first RT game is satisfied.

  Further, the replay symbols are evenly arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, other symbols arranged between the replay symbols and the replay symbols (a different type of symbols from the replay symbols) from one. By using a maximum of four), it is possible to align the replay symbols without the need for pressing.

[Minor role]
As shown in FIG. 65, for the winning combination indicated as accessory 1, “Iris symbol-pine symbol-chrysanthemum symbol” is previously determined as a combination mode of the corresponding symbol (small item 1 symbol).

  When one accessory pattern is prepared, a prescribed number (for example, 8) of medals is paid out. At this time, the payout of medals is performed when the game ends. In other words, a gaming privilege of paying out 8 medals is granted when one accessory is arranged. Like the small items 1, the small items 2 to 10 have a winning combination in which eight medals are paid out.

  In addition, for the winning combination indicated as the accessory 11, “Kiri design-pine design-Kiri design” is determined in advance as a combination mode of the corresponding design (the accessory 11 design).

  When 11 small items are arranged, a prescribed number (for example, 10) of medals is paid out. The payout of medals at this time is also performed in the game. That is, a gaming privilege of paying out 10 medals is awarded when 11 accessories are arranged. Similarly to the accessory 11, the accessory 11 to accessory 19 is also a winning combination in which ten medals are paid out.

  In this way, it can be said that the accessory (small role) is a winning combination that can be expected to increase the number of medals when the game is advanced, or can be expected to suppress the consumption of medals. However, if the frequency of winning small items increases, it becomes possible for the player to increase medals simply by proceeding with the game (there may be an increase in medals without winning BB or RB). The game performance of the slot machine 1 is impaired. It is also feared that it will be easy for players to win excessive medals and the profit balance with the hole will be lost. For these reasons, the winning role of small items has a role that prevents the player from consuming a large amount of medals during the progress of the game, and has a lower probability of winning than replay. . Therefore, as with the above-described replay symbols, the accessory symbols can be arranged evenly on the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c so that they are aligned without the need for pressing.

[Loose]
If none of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 65 is applicable, the game is lost. Then, in the game that is lost, no medal is given, and no change is made to the game after the next time. It can be said that the loser is a winning combination that does not give the player any game privilege in the game and the next and subsequent games.

  Note that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and symbol combinations described above. In addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. In addition, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

[Bonus production]
In this embodiment, during the RT game, a bonus effect performing means for performing a so-called privilege effect is provided for notifying (navigating) a symbol or the like for an internally established flag (mainly a small role). Below, the privilege production | presentation implementation means of this embodiment is demonstrated.

  In the present embodiment, the bonus effect performing means establishes a so-called puncture that ends the RT game (start of the first RT game) when the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game is being performed. Navigating the possibility to suppress the end of the RT, navigating to the player by the method described later, and not to miss the small role won in the internal lottery during the 2nd RT game, 3rd RT game or 4th RT game Eighty production to be performed as a bonus production.

  The RTE end suppression effect is a reel stop button for winning a small role won in the internal lottery based on the effect image displayed on the effect display device 590 and the sound generated from the speakers (L speaker 201a, R speaker 201b). This is an effect of navigating the stop operation procedure 211 (211a to 211c). By performing the reel stop operation in accordance with the contents navigated by the player, it is possible to avoid the formation of a puncture and continue the RT game. In the present embodiment, “re-game 0 (“ Iris design-Kiri design-Kiku design ”)”, which is the start condition of the first RT game, is a punk role.

  In addition, the entertainment effect is navigated so as not to miss the small role won in the internal lottery by the effect image displayed on the effect display device 590 and the sound generated from the speakers (L speaker 201a, R speaker 201b). It is an effect to do.

  In the privilege effect in the present embodiment, the result of the internal lottery when the result of the internal lottery performed on the main control board 409 is “replay 0” (that is, the replay that is the start condition of the first RT game). The peripheral control board 510 that has received the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 (211a to 211c) does not allow the player to win the re-play 0 symbol ("Ayame symbol-Kiri symbol-Kiku symbol") in the game. Navigate the procedure. Whether or not to navigate is determined by lottery on the peripheral control board 510.

  The above-described stop operation procedure of the reel stop button 211 (211a to 211c) for preventing the replay 0 symbol from being won is, for example, a reel stop button that the player should stop at least first. One that navigates among the stop buttons 211 (211a to 211c), one that navigates the stop order of the reel stop buttons 211 (211a to 211c) provided in the slot machine, and a specific symbol It is conceivable that the player navigates to the effect that the winning of replay 0 can be avoided by “pressing”. The privilege effect of the present embodiment is to continue the privilege effect by navigating to the player the button that the player should stop at least first and avoiding the winning of the punk role. Hereinafter, the start and end of the privilege effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  The privilege effect is mainly performed during the RT game after the end of BB or after the end of RB. A lottery regarding whether or not to perform a bonus effect (hereinafter referred to as a bonus effect lottery) is performed on the peripheral control board 510. In the bonus production lottery, in addition to performing a lottery on whether or not to navigate small roles during the RT game after the bonus ends, how many bonus roles to navigate, A lottery is performed on how to display the lottery result to the player.

  The bonus production lottery may be performed regardless of whether the gaming state is during the normal game or during the bonus game. Whether or not the bonus presentation is performed after the bonus presentation lottery and the bonus presentation is performed may be determined by the lottery by the peripheral control board 510. Then, even if the lottery result performed on the main control board 409 is a win, the bonus effect is not always performed after the bonus ends, and there may be a gaming state in which only the second to fourth RT games start. It will be.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery performed on the main control board 409 is “replay 0” (that is, the replay that is the start condition of the first RT game) The peripheral control board 510 that has received the lottery result at least first stops the player so that the player does not win the re-game 0 symbol ("Iris pattern-Kiri symbol-Kiku symbol") in the game. The button to navigate to the player. When the player presses the reel stop button according to the navigated information, it is possible to avoid winning of replay 0 and to continue the bonus effect.

  In other words, the player can simply avoid puncturing the second to fourth RT games (starting the first RT game) simply by following the information about the navigated at least one reel stop button. .

  By the way, as one of the methods for preventing the replay 0 from being won, there is a slot machine that can avoid the replay 0 win by “pressing” a specific symbol. In such a slot machine, if a specific symbol cannot be aimed at, replay 0 is won, and the second to fourth RT games and, as a result, the bonus effect ends (the first RT game starts). In other words, the gaming state (privilege effect) advantageous to the player can be continued for the maximum number of Gs depending on the skill of the player's attention, but may end with the minimum number of Gs. Such slot machines with high technical intervention tend to be avoided by players who have low skill of “pushing” or games (beginners) who are unskilled in games.

  Even if the player has a high level of skill (mainly a player who is highly skilled in gaming, such as a player who is highly skilled in gaming), if he / she plays for a long time, his / her concentration will decrease. It may not be possible to succeed every time. If the player fails to push the game, the gaming state advantageous to the player is ended as soon as possible, so that the interest may be reduced. Above all, it is not easy to wipe away the regret of being able to continue the bonus production if it does not fail.

  In addition, as a slot machine that does not require pressing, it is possible to navigate the stop order of all reel stop buttons 211 (211a to 211c) provided in the slot machine and avoid winning a specific puncture combination. One example is a slot machine equipped with a bonus function. In such a slot machine, the player can continue the advantageous state (privilege effect) for the player by pressing the reel stop button in accordance with the stop order to be navigated.

  However, in a slot machine where the above-mentioned privilege effect is performed, if even one of the navigated stop orders of the reel stop button 211 is wrong, the punk role wins, and any of the second to fourth RT games and the privilege effect is awarded. Will end. Such a slot machine is easy to play even for players with low skill in “tapping” or games unskilled in games (beginners), but the reel stop button every time it is navigated The tension that must be pushed so as not to make a mistake in the stop order of 211 does not disappear during the bonus production. If so, the player cannot easily enjoy the game during the bonus production. Therefore, in order for a player to easily enjoy a game in which a privilege is being produced, the player is more than a slot machine equipped with a privilege production function that navigates the stop order of all reel stop buttons provided in the slot machine. However, it is more preferable that the slot machine is equipped with a privilege effect function as in this embodiment for navigating a button to be stopped at least first.

  In a slot machine equipped with a privilege effect function that navigates the stop order of all reel stop buttons provided in the slot machine, in a game mode in which privilege effect does not occur, the player can use all reel stop buttons. You have to operate the reel stop button only by your intuition for the stop order. If there are three reel stop buttons provided in the slot machine, the probability that the player can stop in the correct stop order with the intuition of the player is 1/6. When such a situation continues for a long time, the player feels painful in the game mode in which the bonus effect does not occur.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the slot machine (three reel stop buttons are provided with a privilege effect function as in this embodiment in which a player navigates at least a button to be stopped first. ), Even in a game mode in which a bonus effect does not occur, it is sufficient that at least the button to be stopped first is a correct answer, so that the player can easily play the game. Even in such a slot machine, the player's intuition can be relied on, but the probability that the player's intuition hits and stops correctly is 1/3, and the burden is lighter than the above-mentioned 1/6. It has become a thing.

  Therefore, in order for a player to easily enjoy a game in which a privilege is being produced, the player is more than a slot machine equipped with a privilege production function that navigates the stop order of all reel stop buttons provided in the slot machine. However, it is more preferable to use a slot machine equipped with a privilege effect function as in this embodiment for navigating a button to be stopped at least first.

  The bonus effect in the present embodiment is that a bonus is internally won when the player navigates the establishment of a small role, operates the stop button according to the navigation, and digests a predetermined number of small roles. Sometimes, the reel stop button 211 is stopped in a form that does not follow the navigation, even though it is navigated not to win the punk role (replay 0) that ends the second to fourth RT games and thus the bonus presentation. When operated (winning of replay 0, which is the start condition of the first RT game), the second to fourth RT games and, thus, the bonus effect ends.

  Among the above, if the player stops the reel stop button without following the navigation before the predetermined number of small roles are consumed, the navigation of the small roles is terminated and the predetermined number of small roles are consumed. Although it is not possible, the replay game (RT) continues. In other words, it is possible to continue up to 5000G unless a replay 0 is won during the RT game.

  Since the slot machine takes at least 4.1 seconds to complete one game, if it continues up to 5000G, it will be navigated for at least 5 hours and 40 minutes. However, when a game is played for such a long time, it is difficult to execute the game in the shortest time (4.1 seconds) for each game, and it is considered that it takes 5 seconds or more per game on average. In this way, if the replay game continues up to 5000G, it will be navigated for about 7 hours.

  Thus, although the basic matter of the privilege effect in this embodiment was demonstrated, the specific effect aspect in a privilege effect is mentioned later.

[Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed by the main control board 409 (mainly the main control MPU).

  FIG. 65 shows one processing procedure for one basic game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, return to the state before the power was turned off. Execute.

  In the next step S2, the multiplier is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, the MAX bet button 206 (or 1 bet button 205) is pressed. Then, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the BET process is executed until the multiplication of one game is determined and the start lever 210 can be operated.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Execute. This internal lottery process is either in the stage before all reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the next step S4 are in a stopped state (stopped by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of the lottery corresponds to any winning combination, the corresponding winning combination is allowed.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation processing, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of acceptance, and rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped. Execute.

  In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has been stopped, the display content displayed on the active line (the combination of symbols) and the above step A determination process for determining the winning combination is performed by checking what is permitted as a result of the internal lottery determined in S3.

  In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. Further, when the winning combination is BB, RB, or replay, granting is performed for various game benefits such as a change in game state or replay.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process), step S3 (internal lottery process), and step S4 (reel rotation process) are performed by the player as a series of operations. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[Startup process]
FIG. 67 specifically shows each process performed in the starting process.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the insertion of medals or the operation of the 1 bet button 205 and the MAX bet button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. Note that this determination is satisfied only when a medal corresponding to a MAX bet is inserted (that is, when three or more medals are inserted) or when a single bet button 205 or a MAX bet button 206 is operated as a MAX bet. It is supposed to be.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined, and the active line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform a bet operation or medal insertion in step S101 or does not result in a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the main control board 409 (main control MPU) in the replay game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, random numbers are extracted in response to the operation. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. As for the timing for extracting the random number at this time, an appropriate extraction timing should be set in the programming process, for example, immediately after the start lever 210 is operated or after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds). Can do.

  In step S107, as a flag process, it is determined (random number value collation) which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as an extracted random number value). In this determination, the extracted random number value is collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the flag corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is set to ON (= 1). The flag corresponding to the winning combination that is ON (= 1) at this time is referred to as the winning combination winning flag.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A hit value determination table in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. In addition to the BB game flag, the game status flag includes an RB1 game flag, an RB2 game flag, a first RT game flag, a second RT game flag, a third RT game flag, a fourth RT game flag, and a fifth RT game. There is a middle flag and a sixth RT game middle flag. When any of these game state flags is in the OFF (= 0) state, the normal game in-progress flag is always in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and the loss flag is turned ON. Here, the winning flag or the lost flag (collectively referred to as the establishment flag) means that the winning symbol corresponding to the establishment flag can be aligned only when the corresponding establishment flag is ON. It will be. Therefore, when the lost flag corresponds to the established flag, none of the winning combination symbols can be arranged. It can also be said that the above-described steps S106 and S107 are random number lottery inside the slot machine 1, and in the following, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. Note that the process from extraction of the random number to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 66 described above).

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has expired (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S109. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) by the player is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination corresponding to the game (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding winning combination). This means that a predetermined winning combination is won. Here, the result of the game in which the corresponding winning combination is permitted is reflected in the subsequent processes (reel stop process, determination process, payout process, etc.) as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery as the “establishment flag” described above. Will be.

  In the slot machine 1, a random value range (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined as, for example, an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 214 = 16384 random numbers). In the slot machine 1, random numbers in the extraction range are set to 0 to 16383 (214 = 16384 random values), but 0 to 32767 (215 = 32768 random values) or 0 to 65535 ( 216 = 65536 random number values). If the extraction range of random numbers is expanded, the range of random number values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased, so that it is difficult to cause an event that specific random number values are extracted in a biased manner.

Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, if the random value corresponding to BB is “1” among the random values in the extraction range (0 to 16383), the result of the internal lottery is “BB” when the extracted random value is “1”. BB's internal lottery flag (established flag, in this case also referred to as the aforementioned winning flag) is processed as an information command in the game. In addition, when this is used, the winning probability of BB (probability that BB is selected as a result of the internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to BB. Speaking of the above example (BB)
[Total number of random values corresponding to BB / Total number of random values in the extraction range]
Is 1/16384, and the winning probability of BB is 1/16384.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined (set), and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (BB), the random value “1” in the extraction range is the winning value corresponding to BB. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of BB is a continuous random value “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” in the extraction range, the range of the winning value of BB Is a random value from “1” to “4”. When it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the random number values “1” to “4” (verified), the result of the internal lottery is “winning BB”.

  From this, the range of winning values for all winning combinations is determined, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any winning combination by internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it is lost. In other words, the range of the winning value of the lost game is other than the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be referred to as a winning allowable value.

[Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping a reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is waited. In FIG. 68, the contents of the reel stop process by the “table method” are shown as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected according to an internal lottery flag indicating the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns are prepared in advance for all the internal lottery flags, and these are stored in the main control board 409 (mainly the main control MPU) as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the internal lottery flag in the above step S201, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (steps S202, S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are received (stop operation procedure) is a stop operation procedure (or pressing sequence) called “forward press”, “reverse press”, and “middle press”, respectively. Say).

The above-described “forward press” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 301a first (that is, a procedure for pressing the left reel stop button 211a first). From the reel operation order to stop after
[Left reel → Middle reel → Right reel],
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [Left reel → Right reel → Middle reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “forward push”. Note that the latter stop operation procedure may also be called “order scissors push”.

The above-described “reverse push” stop operation procedure is an operation procedure in which the right reel 301c is stopped first as opposed to “forward push” (that is, a procedure in which the right reel stop button 211c is pressed first). From the operation order of the reels to be stopped after the second,
[Right reel-> middle reel-> left reel]
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [Right reel → Left reel → Middle reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “reverse pressing”. Note that the latter stop operation procedure is sometimes called “reverse scissor pressing”.

The above-mentioned “middle push” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 301b first (that is, a procedure for pressing the middle reel stop button 211b first). From the operation order of reels to be stopped later,
[Center reel → Left reel → Right reel],
Or
The operation is further divided into two stop operation procedures [middle reel → right reel → left reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “middle press”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. If it is assumed in step S201 that the left reel stop button 211a is first pressed (first) in accordance with the “forward press” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202 is performed. The determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In the first reel stop process, the control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Execute.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203. At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning combination symbol is executed based on the reel control table corresponding to the internal lottery flag (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). . At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stopped reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made. That is, in step S201, if the right reel stop button 211c is pressed first (first) from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c along the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure, The determinations in steps S202 and S210 are not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S217. Step S217 and subsequent steps are processed in the same manner as steps S203, S204, 206, S206, and S208 described above. That is, since the right reel stop button 211c is pressed first (first), the determinations in steps S217 and S218 are satisfied, and the first reel stop process is performed for the right reel 301c (step S219). Then, the reel stop control table for the remaining left reel 301a and middle reel 301b is determined (step S221), and the first reel stop flag and the right reel stop flag RF are set to ON (steps S222 and S223).

  Thereafter, based on the reel stop control table determined in step S221, the left reel stop process (step S205) and the middle reel stop process (step S213) are performed in the order in which the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b are pressed. Executed according to In the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, just as in the “forward push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is in a stopped state, and there is either winning symbol in the upper position or the lower position. In such a case, it is still possible to align the corresponding winning symbol in any of the two active lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

  By the way, in the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, there are some differences from the above description, and therefore, description will be given below. That is, in step S201, if the middle reel stop button 211b is first depressed (first) in accordance with the “middle push” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the depression operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, The determination at S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S210. Steps S210 and thereafter are processed in the same manner as steps S203, S204, 206, S206, and S208 described above. That is, since the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed first (first), the determinations in steps S210 and S211 are satisfied, and the first reel stop process is performed for the middle reel 301b (step S212). Then, the reel stop control tables for the remaining left reel 301a and right reel 301c are determined (step S214), and the first reel stop flag and the middle reel stop flag MF are set to ON (steps S215 and S216).

  Thereafter, based on the reel stop control table determined in step S216, the left reel stop process (step S205) and the right reel stop process (step S220) are performed in the order in which the left reel stop button 211a and the right reel stop button 211c are pressed. Executed according to Here, in the case of “middle press”, unlike the step S206 in the “forward press” (or step S221 in the “reverse press”), the corresponding winning symbol is still aligned on any of the four active lines at this point. It is possible. In other words, if the symbol at the middle position among the stops of the first stop reel (in this case, the middle reel 301b) is a symbol that may become the winning symbol, it is on the effective line based on that symbol. Then, the reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning symbols of the remaining reels (the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c) is selected.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In this embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be determined as appropriate when constructing the control program.

[Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control is performed to pull the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 591a as much as possible (so-called pulling control, with a predetermined number of frames as the upper limit). Drawing in). Specifically, for example, three frames are determined in advance as a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 591a (hereinafter referred to as a pull-in controllable range) when a reel stop operation by the player is accepted. If there is a corresponding winning symbol within the range, control is performed to pull the symbol into the symbol display window 591a and stop the reel. Here, the “pull-in controllable range” refers to the maximum number of frames that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel after the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. For example, if the retractable range is a maximum of 3 frames, it is possible to display up to the third symbol in the reel rotation direction from the position when the reel stop operation is accepted at a predetermined position (for example, middle stage). It becomes. That is, it is possible to draw a symbol in a range of less than 3 frames at maximum (more specifically, a range obtained by subtracting one step from 3 frames). Note that one frame is from one symbol to another symbol adjacent in the reel rotation direction.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 591a at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning symbol is within a range that can be drawn. If there is, the winning winning symbol can be moved to the symbol display window 591a and stopped. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 591a and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  Here, the reel stop control of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c when each reel stop button 211a-211c is operated will be described. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, 14 symbols are written on each reel band 351a, 351b, 351c, and symbol drawing control is performed with the upper limit being 3 symbols.

  Here, among the symbols written on the reel bands 351a, 351b, 351c, the symbols that can be pulled in are as follows.

  When there are a plurality of positions on the effective line displayed in the symbol display window 591a, the maximum number of frames between one position on the effective line and the other position is M (when there is one position on the effective line). Is M = 0), and if the number of frames that can be pulled in is N, symbols can be drawn up to (N + M) frames from the position of the reel bands 351a, 351b, 351c when the stop operation is performed. Here, the “maximum number of frames” is 2 frames when both the upper stage and the lower stage are located on the effective line (2 frames even if the middle stage is located on the effective line), and the upper and middle stages are effective. If it is located on the line, it is one frame. Similarly, when the middle stage and the lower stage are located on the effective line, one frame is provided.

[Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, whether or not the winning combination symbols are arranged on any active line in the symbol display window 591a (whether the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed) or not. Make a decision. In FIG. 72, the content of this determination process is demonstrated concretely.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop process, the winning combination symbols are arranged on any of the active lines from the stop eye mode in the symbol display window 591a (corresponding to the winning combination). It is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols to be displayed is displayed). It should be noted that the stop eye particularly when all the reels are in a stopped state is sometimes referred to as an outcome.

  In steps S301 and S303, it is determined whether an RB game is being played or a BB game is being played. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of game state flags, which will be described later, an RB game flag and a BB game flag.

  If the RB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S301 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S380. If the BB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S303 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S370.

  If both the RB game flag and the BB game flag are OFF (= 0), the determinations in steps S301 and S303 are not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S310.

  After executing the RT game end determination process (details will be described later) in step S310, one of the following steps S320, S330, S340, S350, and S360 is further performed according to the winning combination symbols that are aligned on the active line. Move on.

  In step S320, it is determined whether BB symbols are available. When the BB symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines (“red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S322.

  In the next step S322, a BB game start process is executed. Here, as a BB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games where medals can be easily obtained is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S330, it is determined whether RB symbols are available. When the RB symbols are aligned on the active line ("red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-blue 7 symbol" or "red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-white 7 symbol", this determination is satisfied, and the next step S332 Move on.

  In the next step S332, an RB game start process is executed. Here, as an RB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained according to the BB game is performed (details will be described later).

  In the next step S340, it is determined whether or not the replay symbols are ready. If the replay symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S342. In the present embodiment, in step S340, replay 0 ("Iris design-Kiri design-Kiku design"), replay 1 ("Iris design-Pine design-Kiri design"), replay 3 ("Iris design-Pine"). Design-willow design "), Replay 4 (" Plum design-Pine design-Kiri design "), Re-play 5 (" Ayame design-Plum design-Kiri design "), Re-play 6 (" Ayame design-Pine design- ") When any of the “Ume design”) is prepared, it is determined that the replay design is prepared.

  In the next step S342, a replay game process is executed. In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the main control board 409 (main control MPU) in order to start the next game with the same bet number (in this example, MAX bet) as the bet number in the game. Let Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay.

  Then, after executing the RT game demotion determination process in step S344, in step S346, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the process ends. The RT game demoteing determination process determines whether or not the game state has won a replay 0 (“Ayame symbol-Kiri symbol-Kiku symbol”) during the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT game. When winning, it means a process of ending the current RT state (second RT game, third RT game or fourth RT game) and starting the first RT game.

  In step S350, it is determined whether the small role symbols are available. If the small role symbols are aligned on any of the active lines, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S352. In the present embodiment, in step S350, for example, an accessory 1 ("Iris design-pine design-chrysanthemum design"), for example, an accessory 11 ("Kiri design-pine design-Kiri design") (see FIG. 65 for details). If they are aligned, it is determined that the small role symbols are aligned.

  In the next step S352, a prescribed number of medals are paid out in accordance with the arranged small role symbols (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the medal payout number is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). Thereby, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small role has been paid out.

  Next, when none of the winning combination symbols are aligned on the active line, none of the above determinations in steps S320, S330, S340, and S350 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S360. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”.

  In step S360, a losing process is executed. In this losing process, when the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is a winning flag other than BB and RB, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Further, when the winning flag corresponds to either the BB flag or the RB flag, the winning flag is not turned OFF and is carried over after the next game. As a result, the winning flag is carried over until the corresponding winning combination symbols can be aligned without causing any loss of BB and RB. Therefore, the player can play the game with a sense of security that BB and RB game benefits can be obtained without worrying about losing a winning role with higher profitability than other winning roles such as BB and RB. You can face it. In particular, for a player with a low level of skill, the practice of pressing can be repeated any number of times until the BB symbols (or RB symbols) are aligned.

  The processing from step S310 to step S360 described above is processing executed in the case of a normal game or an RT game. Next, the processing after step S370 will be described. The process here is a process executed in the case of a BB game and an RB game.

  First, in step S370, it is determined whether or not the BB game payout symbols are available. The “BB game payout combination” here is a collective term for winning combinations in which medals are paid out during a BB game including a bonus game exclusive combination in addition to small items (small combination). Then, when the BB game payout symbols are aligned on any of the active lines, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S372.

  In the next step S372, a prescribed number of medals are paid out in accordance with the BB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the BB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Subsequent to step S372, in step S374, a BB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S376, and an RT game start process (specifically, a process for starting any one of the second to fourth RT games) is executed.

  If the determination in step S370 is not satisfied, the process moves to step 378, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). In the present embodiment, no miss-out occurs, and therefore the lost flag corresponds to the establishment flag. That is, in step S378, the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Next, step S380 and subsequent steps will be described. In step S380, it is determined whether or not the RB game payout symbols are available. This “RB game payout” is also a collective term for winning combinations that have a payout during the RB game, similar to the above-mentioned BB game payout. If the RB game payout symbols are aligned on the active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S382.

  In the next step S382, a predetermined number of medals are paid out in accordance with the RB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the RB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Following step S382, in step S384, an RB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S386, where an RT game start process (specifically, a process for starting any one of the second to fourth RT games) is executed.

  If the determination in step S380 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 378 described above, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). Since this was demonstrated previously, description is abbreviate | omitted.

[BB game start processing]
If the determination in step S320 of FIG. 69 is satisfied, the BB game start process is executed. The BB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether the BB flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the BB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the BB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the BB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. From the next game, the BB game is started with the same 3 betting (three) as in the normal game.

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the BB symbols are aligned even though the BB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[BB game end determination process]
Subsequently, the BB game end determination process in step S374 of FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S372 of FIG. 69 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the BB game.

  In step S452, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number has exceeded 400. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, where the cumulative payout number during the BB game is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612, etc. Note that the cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this). If the determination in step S452 is satisfied, the process moves to step S460.

  In step S460, after the BB game flag is turned OFF (= 0), the second RT game start flag is turned ON (= 1) in step S462, and the process is ended.

[RB game start processing]
If the determination in step S330 in FIG. 69 is satisfied, an RB game start process is executed. This RB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether the RB flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S501 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the RB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the RB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. In step S506, the cumulative payout number count during the RB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the RB game is started with the same 3 bet (three) as in the normal game. As a result, the player can play the game without feeling special discomfort compared to the normal game.

  If the determination in step S501 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S502, and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where RB symbols are aligned even though the RB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[RB game end determination processing]
Subsequently, the RB game end determination process in step S384 in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the case of RB1 will be described as an example.

  First, in step S551, in response to the payout of medals in step S382 of FIG. 69 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the RB game.

  Next, in step S552, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number exceeds 20. If the determination in step S552 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S554 to display the cumulative payout number during the RB1 game (displayed on the payout number display LED 612. The cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this).

  If the determination in step S552 is satisfied, the process moves to step S556.

  In step S556, after the RB game flag is turned OFF (= 0), the third RT game start flag is turned ON (= 1) in step S558, and the process is ended.

  In addition, about RB game in this embodiment, RB1 was demonstrated as an example, However, RB game start processing and RB end processing go through the same step also in the case of RB2 game. However, “third RT game” in step 462 is replaced with “fourth RT game”.

[Normal game]
The normal game indicates a state in which the BB game and the RB game are not performed and the second RT game, the third RT game, or the fourth RT is not performed. In some cases, this state is also referred to as a first RT game.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display device 300 (mini reel) is disposed in the upper end region of the upper end portion of the see-through window 214 formed in the substantially upper half of the door-shaped front member 200. Further, the see-through window The image display body 500 (liquid crystal) is arranged in substantially the entire area of 214 except for the upper end area. In addition, since the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination in this embodiment is stopped and displayed on the mini-reel, the combination of symbols that are displayed in a stopped state is won by the player even if the player sees the combination. It is difficult to understand if On the other hand, on the liquid crystal, what combination is displayed is displayed. In addition, the combination of symbols corresponding to the established flag is displayed on the mini reel regardless of the timing at which the reel stop button is pressed if attention is paid only to which reel stop button is pressed first. Therefore, the player concentrates on the production on the liquid crystal and plays the game without looking at the mini reel.

  In this way, if the navigation of the stop operation for aligning the 2nd to 4th RT games, and thus the puncture role and small role of the bonus effect is displayed on the large liquid crystal, the player can display the contents instructed in the liquid crystal. Since it is easy to visually recognize, it is possible to suppress errors in the stop order of the designated reel stop button 211 as much as possible.

  In addition, during the bonus production, as well as navigating so as not to win the second to fourth RT games and thus the bonus production of the punk role, the winning of the small role symbol is also navigated. The player only has to stop the reel stop button as navigated, and does not need to be pushed as described above. In other words, by performing the stop operation of the reel stop button as navigated, for the re-playing role 0 as the punk role of the second to fourth RT games and thus the bonus effect, One of the re-playing roles 1 to 6 as a non-puncturing role can be won. As for a small combination, a small combination that could not be won by the original stop operation can be won. In this way, when the replay role 0 is won as the punk role of the bonus production, the second game to the 4th RT game, and thus the winning of the replay role 0 is avoided without making any effort during the replay time. In addition, when a small role is won, the small role can be won, and the feeling of fatigue that can be given to the player can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is disadvantageous for the player that the second to fourth RTs are terminated by the original stop operation by navigating the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 during the bonus presentation. The winning combination (replay 0) can be awarded to a winning combination (one of replays 1 to 6) that does not trigger the end of the second to fourth RTs. As described above, even if the second game to the fourth RT are controlled in accordance with the winning combination, even if one of the re-games 0 to 6 is won, it is apparently a re-game. Since the prizes having the same profit level as the award are won, the game can be smoothly advanced only by playing the game according to the navigation.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to press the eye, so tired from a long game, failing to push, and end the second to fourth RT game and consequently the bonus production unwillingly, There is no harmful effect that occurs when a small role is missed. Moreover, it is not necessary to use the eye force overused when pushing. As a result, the player can easily play the game, and is less likely to get tired even if it becomes a long game.

[Direction using a saddle character]
The relationship between the effect display device 590 of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment and the movable accessory 5903 will be described. On the liquid crystal screen as the effect display device 590, an effect display area 5901a for displaying an effect image and a symbol display area 5901b for displaying a symbol displayed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery and the reel stop operation are partitioned. (For example, see FIG. 74 (a)). As for the breakdown of the sections, the effect display area 5901a occupies about two thirds from the top of the liquid crystal screen (effect display device 590), and the symbol display area 5901b occupies the remaining one third. This ratio is not limited to the above, and the displayed position is not limited to the above. Therefore, it can be considered that the effect display area 5901a occupies approximately 90% on the left side of the liquid crystal screen (effect display device 590) and the symbol display area 5901b occupies the remaining approximately 10%.

  On the other hand, the movable accessory 5903 is provided on the rear side of the image display body 500 and on the front side of the effect display device 590 (not shown). When the movable accessory 5903 is moved, the effect display area 5901a of the effect display device 590 can be entirely covered in a manner of applying a habit (see, for example, FIG. 75 (b)). Further, there may be a case where the symbol display area 5901b is covered, that is, the entire liquid crystal screen in the effect display device 590 is covered. When this movable combination item 5903 covers the effect display area 5901a in the effect display device 590, the effect display displayed in the effect display area 5901a can be made invisible to the player.

  However, since the movable accessory 5903 is formed from a translucent material or the like, the effect display area 5901a is covered with the movable accessory 5903 and an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 590, thereby allowing the movable effect. It is also possible to perform an effect such that the player can visually recognize the other side of the object 5903 (that is, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 590). When the movable accessory 5903 is not moved, the movable accessory 5903 is stored so as not to interfere with the effect image displayed on the effect display device 590.

  By the way, the slot machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a mini reel so that the effect on the liquid crystal (the effect display area 5901a in the effect display device 590) is not disturbed, so that the player can stop the mini reel. Without worrying about the display, it is possible to concentrate on the effect on the liquid crystal (the effect in the effect display area 5901a in the effect display device 590). Further, in the symbol display area 5901b provided in the effect display device 590, the player can check the symbol displayed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery and the reel stop operation. There is no need to worry about the display, the effect on the liquid crystal (the effect display area 5901a in the effect display device 590) and the internal lottery result (the symbol displayed in the symbol display area 5901b in the effect display device 590) Can be confirmed on one liquid crystal (effect display device 590). Thus, the player does not need to move his / her line of sight other than the effect display device 590 during a normal game, and thus it is difficult for a player to feel tired even in a long-time game.

  Next, description will be made regarding the movable aspect of the movable accessory 5903 and the effect aspect of the effect display device 590. As described above, the movable accessory 5903 is always stored so as not to interfere with the effect image displayed on the effect display device 590, but the effect in the effect display area 5901a is effectively shown to the player. For this reason, only one area of the effect display area 5901a may be covered with the movable accessory 5903, or an effect (details will be described later) in which something is performed on the other side of the covered part may be performed. it can.

  As described above, the effect on the effect display area 5901a can be made even more interesting by tying up and down the movable accessory 5903 with the effect on the liquid crystal. Further, if the movable accessory 5903 is frequently moved, it is possible to make the player think that the production of “super chance mode” (details will be described later) is started. As a result, the player is intrigued and cannot easily stop the game, which may lead to an increase in operating rate for the hall.

  Here, one of the effects (targeted effects) using the movable accessory 5903 will be described as an example with reference to FIG. The target effect is a player-participation-type effect in which the effect is advanced by the player selecting and performing a stop operation of the reel stop button 211. As shown in FIG. 74, first, three targets are arranged in the effect display area 5901a of the effect display device 590. The left target (left image display position) is 5902a, the middle target (middle image display position) is 5902b, and the right target (right image display position) is 5902c. In at least one of these three targets, the letter “T” indicates a win. In FIG. 74 (a), “must” is described in the middle image display position 5902b (“might” may be described in all cases. Is also good). First of all, the player can visually recognize in which case “to” is written.

  Next, the movable accessory 5903 descends so as to cover the target display area 5901a (see FIG. 74B). Then, the player can see only the target silhouette due to the presence of the movable scissors 5903. Then, after the target replacement is randomly performed with movement on the other side of the movable accessory 5903 (within the effect display area 5901a), which target is hit (that is, “this” is described) Is selected by a stop operation of the reel stop button 211 (211a to 211c).

  In this stop operation, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), “?” Is displayed in one of the three targets (which may indicate a frustration). Also good). The player selects one target by selecting the reel stop button 211 (211a to 211c) in the next game in which this “?” Is displayed (selecting which reel stop button to stop). Therefore, you can select one of the targets that are described as “this”. The player may select the reel selection button 211 corresponding to the target indicated by “?” (Left image display position 5902a in FIG. 74), or believe other than the left image display position 5902a. Reels may be selected.

  When the player performs a stop operation of the reel stop button 211 (211a to 211c), the character displayed in the effect display area 5901a throws a flower card toward the extension line of the reel stop button 211 that was stopped first. An effect is performed (those thrown by the character are not limited to flower cards, but may be darts, playing cards, rose flowers, etc.). The thrown flower card is designed to be inserted by the player when the reel stop button 211 is stopped first, so that the player displays which target the player has selected. It can also be confirmed on the display via the region 5901a.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the character performs an action of throwing a flower card in conjunction with a stop operation of the reel stop button 211 by the player, but is not limited to this mode. In addition, even if the reel stop button 211 is stopped and the character is spoken at the same time as if the speaker speaks, or even if the player selects one target, where is the target described as “this” If the character shows an attitude such as “I don't know at all”, or if the selected target is out of place, it will have a free action as if putting the player into the game, along with the line “I do n’t care” You may let the character perform it. The player can play the game while enjoying the reaction of the character every time the action of the character is different for each presentation.

  Thereafter, the movable scissors combination 5903 is raised (stored in the original position), so that the player confirms whether or not the target selected by the player is the target described as “this”. (See (d) of FIG. 74). In this example, the target of “to” that was initially in the middle image display position 5902b is randomly replaced in the back of the bag (movable hook accessory 5903), so that the position of the left image display position 5902a is finally obtained. The player corresponds to the left image display position 5902a as the left image display position 5902a is stabbed by a flower card thrown by the character displayed in the effect display area 5901a. This shows that a stop operation has been performed from the reel stop button 211a.

  In addition, since the above-described effect is an effect performed on the peripheral control board 510 in response to the result of the lottery in the internal lottery of the main control board 409, the hit / decision is not actually determined by the stop operation by the player. Therefore, when the lottery result in the internal lottery of the slot machine 1 in this embodiment is a win, regardless of the target selected by the player in the above-described effects (no matter which stop operation is performed from any reel stop button) Controls to select the target that is marked as “To”, and if the result of the internal lottery is a loss, it is controlled not to select the “To” target regardless of which target is selected. It is also possible to do. When controlled in this way, the player cannot look into the other side of the movable winning combination 5903 (in the effect display area 5901a) due to the presence of the movable winning combination 5903. There is no way of knowing whether or not it was possible to draw a win because the internal lottery was lost.

(Flower card directing)
The slot machine 1 in the present embodiment is equipped with a privilege effect function, and the privilege effect that starts after the bonus ends is particularly called “Kimsan TIME” (details will be described later). The effect that informs the player during the bonus whether or not to enter Kim's TIME after the bonus ends is “flower card effect”.

  The Hanafuda effect will be described with reference to FIG. The “flower card effect” is an effect that is performed using several games related to the second half of the bonus game (it can be performed in the first half of the bonus game). In the “flower card effect”, since the symbol corresponding to the “target” of the above-mentioned target effect is changed to “flower card”, the effect mode is the same as the “target” effect. The player can see the end of this production while participating in the game, and know whether or not the bonus production will be started in the second to fourth RT games after the bonus game is finished, in parallel with the digestion of the bonus game. it can.

  Details of the Hanafuda effect will be described. First, three cards are arranged in the effect display area 5901a of the effect display device 590. The design of the Hanafuda includes the Hanafuda (left image display position) 5902a located on the left side, the Hanafuda (middle image display position) 5902b located in the middle, and the Hanafuda (right image display position) 5902c located on the right side. To do. In the present embodiment, a “senya symbol” is displayed at the left image display position 5902a, a “machimusume symbol” is displayed at the middle image display position 5902b, and a “money symbol” is displayed at the right image display position 5902c (FIG. 75). reference). In the Hanafuda direction, if you can finally select “Kan-san symbol”, you will receive “Super Kim-san TIME” (to be described later) and “Machimusume symbol”, which will continue to be used until the next bonus. In this case, “Kin-san TIME” (described later), which is a bonus production with an upper limit on the number of times, is lost when “Zenya Symbol” is applied.

  Next, the movable accessory 5903 descends so as to cover the effect display area 5901a (see FIG. 75 (b)). Then, the player can see only the silhouette of the flower card due to the presence of the movable guard 5903. Then, after the exchange of the flower cards is randomly performed with movement on the other side of the movable accessory 5903 (within the effect display area 5901a), which flower card is the winning card (that is, the “town girl symbol” or “ "?" Is displayed on the silhouette of each object on the movable accessory 5903 in order to allow the player to select which of the Hanafuda with "Mr. Kim's symbol" (see Fig. 75 (c)). ).

  Then, after the player performs a stop operation of the reel stop button 211 (211a to 211c) so as to select any one of the bills, the movable saddle accessory 5903 is raised (stored in the original position). As a result, whether or not the result selected by the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is correct (the “town girl symbol” or “Kin-san symbol” is written at the position corresponding to the reel stop button 211 that has been operated first. Whether or not there is a flower card that is displayed) is confirmed by the player ((d) of FIG. 75).

  As shown in (d) of FIG. 75, after the player selects one card, only the selected card is displayed (middle image display position 5902b). The left image display position 5902a and the right image display position 5902c where the unselected flower cards were located are indicated by white two-dot chain lines ((d) in FIG. 75) because they are not displayed. Since “Mr. Kim” symbol is displayed at the middle image display position 5902b, the player selects “Mr. Kim” symbol as a result of selecting the middle image display position 5902b by the stop operation from the reel stop button 211b. In addition to the fact that the bonus game has been completed, it is indicated that the bonus game is continued until the next bonus (super money Mr. TIME). By seeing this result, the player can recognize in advance that “the bonus game will be continued until the next bonus after the bonus game ends”.

  As mentioned above, if you can select a flower card with a stunning “town girl symbol” or “Kin-san symbol” in the Hanafuda effect, the bonus effect will start after the bonus ends. Even if you could not select the Hanafuda with “Machimusume design” or “Kinsan design” (that is, the selected design was “Senya design”), there will be no bonus effect after the bonus ends It doesn't mean it won't start. This is because the bonus production lottery is also performed during the bonus game, and there is a possibility of winning the bonus production lottery even during the Hanafuda production.

  If the lottery result of the bonus production lottery is a win, no matter which card card is selected by the player in the Hanafuda production (no stop operation from any reel stop button), “Machimusume design” or “Kimsan design” To control the selection of the flower card with "", and informs the player that the result of the bonus production lottery is a win. In other words, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to start the bonus effect is a loss, control is performed so as to select the “Zenya symbol” of the lost symbol, regardless of which flower card is selected. Even if such control is performed, the player cannot look into the other side (in the effect display area 5901a) of the movable winning combination 5903 due to the presence of the movable winning combination 5903. About whether you could not draw "Machimusume design" or "Kinsan design" because the lottery result of whether or not to start the bonus production was lost in the first place? Has no way of knowing.

(Super chance mode)
In addition to the above-mentioned directing effects and flower card effects, there is a “super chance mode” as an effect using the movable accessory 5903. The super chance mode is a case where small items (small roles) 11 to 19 (see FIG. 65) are won in the internal lottery on the main control board 409 in a non-directing state during bonus games or bonus performances, or small items. (Pocket) 1-10 (see FIG. 65) are won (these small roles are referred to as chance small roles, but the details will be described later). It is a production. In addition, when the small items (small roles) 11 to 19 (see FIG. 65) are won, it shifts to the super chance mode than when the small items (small roles) 1 to 10 (see FIG. 65) are simultaneously won. Easy to set.

  The peripheral control board 510 receives the chance small role winning information received from the main control board 409 and draws whether or not to shift to the super chance mode, and also draws the number of games, that is, in the super chance mode. A lottery about how many games will be played. These lottery results vary depending on the type of the chance small combination obtained, but details will be described later. In addition, during the lottery and super chance mode games, the number of games to be continued in the super chance mode (the number of addition games in the super chance mode) is drawn by lottery, and the number obtained by the lottery is determined in the super chance mode. The super chance mode may be continued by adding to the game.

  The transition to the super chance mode will be specifically described with reference to FIG. (A) of FIG. 76 is a diagram showing that the movable winning combination 5903 descends from the upper part of the effect display area 5901a by about one fifth during the normal game. At this time, a rattling sound is generated from the speaker and the movable accessory 5903 is visible and hidden. When the movable accessory 5903 covers all of the effect display area 5901a, it can be expected to shift to a super chance. Therefore, at this time, the player can play the game with the expectation that “there may be a transition to the super-chance mode”. When the mode does not shift to the super chance mode (that is, when the movement of the movable winning combination 5903 is a gaze effect), the movable winning combination 5903 is stored in the original position as shown in FIG. .

  FIG. 76 (b) is a diagram showing that the movable combination item 5903 has fallen from the upper part of the effect display area 5901a by about one third. In FIG. 76 (c), the movable combination item is displayed. It is a diagram showing that 5903 has descended to the extent that the lower fifth of the effect display area 5901a is left, but when these effects also do not shift to the super chance mode (the operation of the movable accessory 5903 is a gasset effect) If there is, the movable scissors combination 5903 is stored in the original position as shown in FIG. The same applies to the case where the movable accessory 5903 covers the entire effect display area 5901a as shown in FIG. Whether or not to shift to the super-chance mode is determined after the stop operation of all reel stop buttons 211 (211a to 211c) in the game and the MAX bet button related to the next game is operated, or the MAX bet button This is determined when the start lever 210 is operated after the above operation. Specifically, if the transition to the super-chance mode is not made, the movable combination object 5903 that has covered the effect display area 5901a is moved to the original position as shown in FIG. By being stored in the player, the player can recognize it.

  Contrary to the above, when shifting to the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), after the movable winning combination 5903 covers the entire effect display area 5901a during the game, the reel in the game After the stop operation of the stop button 211 (211a, 211b, 211c), the moveable accessory 5903 remains in the state of covering the entire effect display area 5901a and the next game is started (the MAX bet button is operated) Or when the start lever 210 is operated after the MAX bet button is operated), a background indicating that the super-chance mode has been entered is displayed on the other side (the effect display area 5901a) of the movable accessory 5903. .

  Specifically, the “background indicating the entry into the super-chance mode” is displayed in a state where the other side (effect display area 5901a) of the movable hook 5903 can be seen through. For example, the tenant background displayed in FIGS. 76A to 76C is changed to a sunset background. The background image associated with the transition to the super chance mode is not limited to the sunset background described above, and may be a snow country, a desert, a space, or the like.

  The probability of shifting to the super chance mode is set very low (details will be described later). In addition, as described above, the opportunity to shift to the super-chance mode is a chance small role (details will be described later), and there is a possibility that bonuses are won in duplicate for this chance small role. Therefore, the player can have a strong expectation that the bonus may have been doubled just by switching to the super chance mode. In particular, in this embodiment, if the bonus is won during the super chance mode, the player will be transferred to Super Kimi TIME that continues until the next bonus after the bonus ends. You can play games as you wish.

  As described above, while the super-chance mode is in the state where the movable accessory 5903 covers the effect display area 5901a of the effect display device 590, the symbol display area 5901b of the effect display device 590 is not covered. As a result, even if the effect display area 5901a and the movable accessory 5903 in the effect display device 590 are performing the mode effect (in the super chance mode), the player can enjoy the effect and perform the internal lottery. The lottery result and the like can be easily confirmed in the symbol display area 5901b of the effect display device 590.

(Mode of bonus production)
The slot machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a privilege effect function as described above. As the bonus effect, an RT effect suppression effect and an ATT effect are performed.

  The RT termination end effect is a reel stop so that the RT game does not end (the first RT game starts) in the RT game (second RT game, third RT game, fourth RT game) after the bonus (BB, RB) ends. This is to navigate the stop operation procedure of the button 211 (that is, the stop operation procedure in which the lip pan combination is established).

  The AT effect is for the small role established in the internal lottery during the second to fourth RT games in which the probability that the re-game role is selected in the internal lottery on the main control board 409 is higher than the normal gaming state. The peripheral control board 510 is navigated to facilitate the winning of the small role.

  In the present embodiment, two types of effects are performed as such a privilege effect, and one is an effect effect that provides an upper limit of the number of times of navigation that facilitates winning of a small role determined by lottery ( The other is ART (referred to as "Super-Kan-san TIME") that continues navigation up to the next bonus for facilitating the winning of the small role determined by the lottery. .

  It should be noted that the AT effect is ended when the establishment of a predetermined number of small roles is navigated in a set of privilege effects. The predetermined number to which the establishment of the small role is navigated is determined by lottery on the peripheral control board 510, and the lottery is referred to as “navigator small number lottery”. The number of small roles determined by the Navi small role lottery is 3, 5, or 7 (not limited to these numbers), and the number of one small role is determined from these. For example, if the number of small roles determined by the Navi small role lottery is 7, the replay continues until the 7 small roles are established in one set of bonus effects. The bonus production ends when the small role is established.

  For the number of small roles (3, 5 or 7) to be navigated in the above-mentioned set of special effects, the lottery probability varies stepwise depending on the slot machine settings. Yes. For example, the probability that the number of small roles in one set is 7 (the probability that “7” is selected by lottery) is higher in the case of the highest setting (eg, 6) than in the case of the lowest setting (eg, 1). Is higher.

  By the way, whether or not the bonus effect is started after the bonus ends is determined by the bonus control lottery performed by the peripheral control board 510 that has received the information that the bonus is won in the internal lottery on the main control board 409. Whether or not the bonus production lottery is won is determined by generating a warning sound from the speaker provided on the gaming machine during the bonus game, In the reel stop operation, the player can confirm by such an effect that “7-7-7” symbol or “gold-gold-gold” symbol is arranged in the symbol display area 5901b. Note that the above symbols may be arranged according to the skill of the player, or may be controlled so that the symbols are aligned by digestion with free hits, because they were not aligned (not aligned). It does not clearly indicate that the bonus production lottery was not won.

  In the bonus production lottery, a lottery for determining whether or not the bonus production is started after the bonus is ended, a lottery for how many bonus productions are continued (a bonus production set number lottery), and whether or not the bonus production is stocked. A lottery (private effect stock addition lottery) is determined. The number of privilege effect set is displayed as “P”. As a bonus effect to be stocked, there is a bonus effect (Kimsan TIME) in which an upper limit of the number of times of navigation according to the number of small roles is provided, or a bonus effect (Super Kim-san TIME) that continues until the next bonus. Details of the bonus effect stock addition lottery will be described later.

  Here, with respect to the effect aspect of the privilege effect (the privilege effect (Kin-san TIME) provided with the upper limit of the number of times of navigating according to the number of small roles) in the present embodiment, specifically using FIGS. 77 to 79. explain. FIG. 77A shows the end of the bonus game. When the start lever 210 is operated after the game displaying the end of the bonus game, the effect display area 5901a is switched to the image shown in FIG. 77 (b). Further, when the start lever 210 is operated, the number of small roles (the number of small roles) in the above-described one set of privilege effects is drawn (navigation small number). There are three, five, and seven Navi small roles, and one of these Navi small roles is determined by lottery. In addition, the number of privilege production sets and the number of small navigation roles are not limited to the above numbers.

  The Navi small role number determined by the Navi small role number lottery is displayed as a bill (small role) symbol in the upper part (navigation small number display area 5904) of the (b) effect display area 5901a of FIG. In the present embodiment, since three handprint symbols are displayed in the effect display area 5901a, it is indicated that the number of Navi small roles determined by the Navi small role number lottery was three. In the case where the number of Navi small roles is three, in the bonus effect, the player is navigated to the establishment of the punk role (replay 0) at the replay time while continuing the replay until the small role is established three times.

  The navigation about the establishment of the small role and the establishment of the puncture role of the replay time is performed by pressing a reel stop button to be stopped first among a plurality of reel stop buttons in the reel stop button 211 from a speaker provided on the gaming machine. This is performed by informing the user of “left”, “middle”, and “right” by voice, or displaying the position of the reel stop button to be stopped on the effect display area 5901a. The player can continue the privilege effect game without establishing the puncture role (replay 0) of the second to fourth RT games and consequently the privilege effect by performing the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 according to the navigation. It is also possible to win a prize without missing the established small role.

  (C) of FIG. 77 navigates that the reel stop button 211 (reel stop button 211a) located on the left side should be stopped first in order to win the small combination based on the establishment of the small combination. Indicates that When the small role is navigated, the accessory symbol displayed in the navigation small role number display area 5904 is displayed with “1” subtracted and displayed in the effect display area 5901a. At this time, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the reel stop button 211 (reel stop button 211a) located on the left side, the stop operation is performed from the reel stop button 211 (reel stop button 211c) located on the left side of the effect display area 5901a. In the case of making it, the player should perform the stop operation of the reel stop button 211c located on the left side by displaying the large on the right side of the effect display area 5901a so that the player should stop the reel stop button 211a located on the right side. It is easy to see what is.

  The basic navigation mode is the same for the puncture of replay time. However, when navigating the puncture role of the replay time, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the player is given a reel stop button to be stopped with a warning sound more serious than in the case of navigating the small role. Inform. Because it does not follow the above-mentioned navigation of the small role formation, it only remains to miss the small role, but the reel stops without following the navigation of the second to fourth RT games and the bonus production punk role (replay 0) This is because, when the operation is performed, the puncture combination (replay 0) is established, and the privilege effect ends (see (f) of FIG. 77).

  Examples of the serious warning sound include a sound that suddenly interrupts or deceives a game such as a siren or a human scream suddenly. It is preferable to be suddenly generated. In addition to the warning sound, in the effect display area 5901a, it is possible to display an image indicating that a puncture of replay time is established unless a correct stop operation is performed ((e) in FIG. 77). In this manner, the player can be accurately informed that the game can win the replay time puncture by stopping the reel stop button, and the player inadvertently wins the punk role. It can be suppressed.

  As already described, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not need to be pushed except for bonuses, so that it is possible to prevent a small part from being missed. As a result, it has become a specification that makes it easy for players and the elderly to play slot machines for the first time. However, if all the games in the slot machine can be made free-of-charge, it may end up losing the original goodness of the slot machine that has the taste and fun that the winning results obtained by the player's stop operation differ. Absent. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the establishment of the small role and the formation of the puncture role (replay 0) during the 2nd to 4th RT games and the bonus production are caused by the player's stop operation, but the stop Regarding operations, it is possible to reliably win a small role by following each navigation, and it is possible to prevent a punk role from being formed unwillingly.

  As described above, in the bonus production, when a small role is established, the correct stop operation procedure is navigated so that the small role can be easily won. In addition, when the replay time puncture role (replay 0), which is the trigger for the end of the second to fourth RT games and the bonus production, is established, it is different from the establishment of the small role, By navigating with a hesitation warning sound or the like, the player is given a moderate tension different from that when the small role is established, and as long as the navigation is followed, the second to fourth RT games As a result, the player can continue the game with a sense of security that the game can be continued without unnecessarily ending the bonus production.

  (D) of FIG. 77 is a diagram showing that the number of bills in the navigation small number display area 5904 is subtracted from 3 to 2 after one small role is navigated. Thereafter, from (a) to (d) of FIG. 78, the same game as the above ((b) to (d) of FIG. 77) is repeated. When all the bills of the bill symbol are navigated (that is, the number of bills in the navigation small role number display area 5904 becomes “0”), the movable winning combination 5903 comes down in the effect display area 5901a (effect display). The special effect is temporarily ended by performing a display as if the shallow yellow curtain is closed in the area 5901a ((a) of FIG. 79). This is a series of a flow of privilege production.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), even if it appears as if the privilege effect has once ended, as shown above, the number of times of setting the privilege effect performed by operating the start lever 210 after the bonus ends. If the number of bonus productions set (P) determined by lottery (private production set times lottery) is greater than “0” (P> 0), when the MAX bet button is operated or when the start lever 210 is operated An effect indicating that the privilege effect is still continued is displayed together with the call “Still still” (FIG. 79 (b)). However, if the set number (P) of the bonus effect is “0” (P = 0), the bonus effect is ended and the normal effect state is restored ((b ′) in FIG. 79).

  As shown in (b) of FIG. 79, when the bonus effect is continued, the lottery (the Navi bonus role lottery) regarding the number of small navigation roles in one set of the next bonus effect is the above privilege. This is performed when the start lever 210 is operated after the presentation has ended. FIG. 79 (c) shows that the navigation small number “5” has been determined by the lottery.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment performs the stop operation of the reel stop button without following the navigation about the punk role (replay 0) of the replay time (second RT game, third RT game, fourth RT game) during the bonus presentation. Unless the game is performed, the replay game continues unless a predetermined number of small roles are won (until the above-mentioned Navi small number is subtracted from 5 to 0). In other words, the replay game may continue without winning a predetermined number of small roles, and a bonus may be won as it is in the privilege effect. Then, even though the bonus presentation is not Super Kim TIME (a bonus presentation that continues until the next bonus win), as a result, the bonus presentation continues until the next bonus. There may be cases.

  Here, during the execution of special effects on a general gaming machine, it is normally expected that a small role will win a net increase in the number of game media that can be obtained, so the player wants to win as many small roles as possible. The game continues while wishing. On the other hand, during the bonus presentation in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, if the bonus presentation is not Super Kim's TIME, a predetermined number of small roles will be elected until the next bonus prize. The function is different from that of a general gaming machine in that a game can be performed while wishing not to be desired. In other words, while a bonus game can be expected to increase the number of game media, in the bonus production, a game can be played while expecting how it can continue without reducing the game media until the next bonus. As a result, the player's feelings in the bonus game and the bonus effect can be sharpened.

  In the bonus presentation in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the player stops by a predetermined number of small roles (for example, until it is won five times as a small role for “Navi small role number“ 5 ”). By navigating the operation procedure, a small role as an award can always be obtained when a small role is won in the correct stop operation procedure, so that a certain satisfaction can be obtained. However, the fact that the effect production is performed means that the end of the bonus effect is gradually approaching, for example, when the effect production for a predetermined number of times is performed immediately after the replay time is started. In that case, rather than satisfying the small role, you will get dissatisfied with the end of the replay time.

  Here, when compared with a complete running type replay time (replay time in which the limit number of replay games is determined in advance) in a general revolving game machine, the end of the bonus effect in this embodiment is a stop operation by RT The player cannot easily predict the end of the bonus effect unless the procedure is reversed. In other words, since the end of the bonus effect in the present embodiment depends on the timing of winning the small role in the internal lottery during the replay game, when the replay time ends in what other games, such as the complete run type replay time It is difficult for a player to continue playing while predicting.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment in which the bonus presentation ends by winning a predetermined number of general roles, it is satisfied by winning the general role and easily acquiring game media through the ATT effect. While gaining a feeling, every time an Eighty effect is performed, it is possible to have a feeling of jealousy that cannot be achieved simply by obtaining a game medium.

  Here, as already described, even if the player has intentionally ended the bonus presentation, the bonus presentation execution means is determined in advance at the time of winning the specific combination. Among the number of times of the effect production, the effect production of the number of times that the effect production was not performed (shortage) can be stored in the peripheral control RAM and carried over to the next benefit effect. And when the next bonus production is started, in addition to the predetermined number of Eighty productions determined at the time of this special production, the bonus production related to the carryover effect of the shortage carried over can be performed. .

  Specifically, when the bonus presentation is performed during the second RT to the fourth RT after the bonus ends, the player is mistaken even though the proper stop operation procedure is taught by the RT termination suppression presentation. However, if a punk role (replay 0) as a specific role is won because the stop operation is different from the instructed stop operation procedure, a small role ( For example, the case where there are three times is given), for example, only one time can be acquired, and the second to fourth RTs are ended. In this case, the privilege effect is immediately terminated (intermediate termination means) and the first RT is started. If it does so, in the said special effect production, it will be said that two times of eighty productions were not performed.

  After that, if the player wins the bonus again by continuing the game, and the bonus presentation is performed again based on winning the bonus presentation lottery as a specific condition, in the previous (previous) bonus presentation The two (unsatisfactory) eighty effects that were not performed are performed in the bonus effects. Of course, since it has been decided that a certain number of Eighty productions will be performed in the bonus productions by winning the bonus production lottery, the player is required to perform an appropriate stop operation procedure taught in the Eighty productions. By simply following the above, it is possible to enjoy two shortages and eighty effects produced by the bonus production. That is, when the number of predetermined general roles determined at the start of the privilege effect is three times, the eighty effect effects are performed together with the shortage.

  For example, the player can visually recognize the five-time eighty effect by displaying five small roles in the navigation small number display area (5904) in FIG. 77 (b).

  In addition, when there is a shortage of the effect production in the previous privilege production, the privilege production is performed during the second to fourth RTs after the bonus ends even if the bonus production lottery is lost.

  Further, the above-mentioned eighty effects can be performed prior to (ie, prior to) the eighty effects determined during the bonus presentation. In the bonus effect, the player's stop operation is performed unless the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed contrary to the stop operation procedure taught by the RT finish suppression effect until the number of shortages carried over is reached. A stop operation procedure is taught so as to facilitate the winning of a small role due to the procedure. Then, after all the deficient effects have been performed, the effect image is displayed as if the bonus effects are once ended, and then the specified number of effects determined for the bonus effects are performed. .

  As described above, when the bonus presentation is performed during the second to fourth RTs after the bonus is ended, if the reel stop button 211 is stopped against the teaching of the end of the RTE end suppression, the puncture as the specific role is performed. The winning combination (replay 0) wins, and the AT effect is ended halfway (midway ending means).

  In this case, for example, in the navigation small number display area (5904) in FIG. 77 (b), first, a number (two) of bills corresponding to two shortages is displayed. In this way, when a halfway number of bills are displayed, the player can be made aware that the AT effect has ended halfway in the previous bonus effect. Based on these numbers, after the establishment of a small role is instructed based on these numbers, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), it is displayed in the effect display area 5901a as if the privilege effect was once finished, and further, FIG. As shown in (b) of the above, it is displayed that the privilege effect is continued (to be precise, the privilege effect is started from here). Thereafter, three bills are displayed in the navigation small number display area (5904) in FIG. 79 (c) as the number of times of the effect production (three times) determined at the time of the benefit effect.

  As described above, the two deficient effects produced by the pioneer effect performing means can be performed prior to the dating effect of the number of times performed by the privilege effect. As a result, for a player who has inadvertently ended the replay time in the previous bonus presentation, the game can be continued while confirming that the two shortages can be acquired in the subsequent bonus presentation. .

  In addition, when a player who has played a game without knowing that the replay time has ended in an unwilling manner in the previous bonus production has ended, the other player can play the game If the player enjoys the deficiency of the ATE production for two shortages prior to the bonus production, the player feels a sense of profit by having obtained the bonus production that was not normally obtained, Become. Thereby, a privilege effect that the player did not intend can be performed, and the player can be raised.

(Bonus production that continues until the next bonus)
Although not shown in the present embodiment, the progress of the bonus presentation (Super Kim-san TIME) that continues until the next bonus is basically the bonus presentation (Kane-san TIME) with the upper limit of the number of times of navigation described above. Although the same, the display mode of the navigation small number display area 5904 is different. Super Kimi TIME has no concept about the upper limit of the number of small navigation roles because the bonus effect continues until the next bonus (the so-called infinite privilege effect). Therefore, in the Navi small role display area 5904 in Super Kim's TIME, it is possible to navigate the formation of the small role without displaying the small role (small item) (the maximum number of navigating), and the bonus until the next bonus is won. A production game progresses.

(End of bonus production)
Kim's TIME (including Super Kim's TIME) ends when a bonus puncture (replay 0) is awarded. Winning a bonus puncture role means that the reel stop button has not been stopped as navigated. Kim-san TIME (including Super Kim-san TIME) has transitioned to the RT game of the 2nd RT game, 3rd RT game, or 4th RT game after the bonus ends, but as described above, the role of puncture for bonus production If the stop operation of the reel stop button is not performed as navigated, “Replay 0” (see FIG. 65) is won. In other words, the RT game (one of the second RT game, the third RT game, and the fourth RT game) that has been continued is terminated and a first RT game is newly started.

(Bonus production stock)
In this embodiment, the bonus effect stock addition lottery is performed when (1) a bonus is established based on the result of the internal lottery on the main control board 409, (2) during a bonus game, (3) during a bonus effect, (4) a predetermined condition. By satisfying the above, it is also performed during the second to fourth RT games in which the privilege effect is not performed. The lottery is a lottery performed by the peripheral control board 510 in response to the result of the internal lottery on the main control board 409, and a bonus effect stock addition lottery may be performed under conditions other than the above. The bonus production that will be stocked is the bonus production (Kin-san TIME) that has an upper limit of the number of navigating according to the stock (stock X) of the bonus production (Super Kim-san TIME) that will continue until the next bonus and the number of small roles ) Stock (stock Y).

  The bonus effect stock addition lottery is performed at the timing when the start lever 210 is operated after satisfying the above conditions (1) to (4). Normally, the player does not visually recognize whether or not the bonus effect stock addition lottery is performed, but it may be visually recognized. In this embodiment, when the bonus effect stock addition lottery is performed during the bonus game, the predetermined winning combination is not displayed in the symbol display area 5901b (the medal is also displayed) even though the bonus game is being performed. A predetermined losing eye is displayed on the screen. Therefore, the player can recognize that the bonus effect lottery has been performed in the game by visually recognizing the lost eye. The winning probability of the bonus effect stock addition lottery varies stepwise depending on the setting of the slot machine 1, and also varies depending on the lottery state of the game when the bonus effect stock addition lottery is performed. The lottery state will be described later.

(Chance small role)
Here, the chance small role is explained. In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery on the main control board 409, there are two types depending on the peripheral control board 510 that has received the winning information of the small roles (small items) 11 to 19 or the small roles (small items) 1 to 10 (see FIG. 65). It is distributed to the chance small role. By assigning the same combination to two types of small combinations, various lotteries can be performed on the peripheral control board 510, and a variety of controls and effects can be achieved. Two types of small combinations are referred to as “chance small combination 1” and “chance small combination 2” in the present embodiment. When the chance small role 1 is won, the symbol display area 5901b displays the “depot-delicacy-delicacy” symbol, and when the chance small role 2 is selected, the symbol display region 5901b displays the “drawstring-pouch-drawn” symbol. By this, the player can confirm on the symbol display area 5901b which chance small role has been won.

  The distribution of the two types of chance small roles includes a case where the small items 11 to 19 are formed with a bonus and a case where the small items are formed independently. Specifically, when the accessory is formed overlapping with the bonus, the chance small part 1 (delicacy symbol) is easily selected, and when the accessory is established alone, the chance small part 2 (drawstring symbol) is easily selected. Is set. For example, when “delicacy symbol” is displayed in the symbol display area 5901b of the effect display device 590 (development-delicacy-development), the expectation level that overlaps with the bonus increases, whereas the high-precision lottery state Expectation to move to becomes lower. On the other hand, when “drawstring symbol” is displayed in the symbol display area 5901b of the effect display device 590 (drawstring-pouch-drawstring), the expectation level overlapping with the bonus is lowered, but the state shifts to the high-precision lottery state. Expectation to be higher.

  In this game machine, in the internal lottery on the main control board 409, the chance of being small is reduced by the peripheral control board 510 that has received the winning information of the small roles (small items) 11-19 or the small roles (small items) 1-10 (see FIG. 65) The probability (selection probability) of being assigned to the role 1 (delicacy) is about 75%, whereas the probability (selection probability) of being assigned to the chance small role 2 (drawstring) is 25%. That is, when winning the small items 1 to 19 in the internal lottery, the bottle of liquor is likely to be selected about three times the purse. In other words, it can be confirmed as a small role in which the virtue is likely to appear about three times the purse for the player.

  As described above, the player has different chances of expecting the bonus held by the two types of chance small roles, so that the player can visually recognize that the chance small role has been won, but the bonus has been doubled. It is difficult to determine at a glance whether there is a possibility or a possibility of shifting to the high-precision lottery state. As a result, if the player wins the chance small role 1 (delicacy symbol), the player can play the game with the expectation that the bonus has been won in duplicate, and the chance small role 2 (drawstring) In the case of winning the symbol), the player can play a game with a sense of expectation for shifting to the high-precision lottery state even if the bonus is not expected to be so much.

  In addition, after being assigned to two kinds of chance small roles according to the small roles (small roles 11 to 19 or small roles 1 to 10) won in the internal lottery on the main control board 409 as described above, the peripheral control is performed. The board 510 further includes (1) a lottery in the lottery state (high or low probability), (2) a lottery in which the number of highly reliable games is added in the high-precision lottery state, (3) a lottery in transition to the super chance mode, and (4) a bonus production stock. Add lottery. When the lottery state transition lottery ((1) above) the lottery state of the peripheral control board 510 shifts to the high-accuracy state and when it does not enter the high-accuracy state (low-probability state), the super chance mode is entered. Since there is a difference in the lottery regarding the transition of the above ((3) above) and the addition of the bonus effect stock (above (4)), the high probability lottery state and the low probability lottery state will be specifically described below.

[High-precision lottery state and low-precision lottery state]
The high probability lottery state is a lottery state (peripheral control board 510) in which it is easy to shift to the above-described super chance mode as compared with the low probability gaming state, and to easily add bonus production stock (stock Y) that can be shifted to after the bonus ends. The lottery status in The high probability lottery state shifts based on the result of the lottery state transition lottery performed when the above-mentioned chance small role is won during the game when the bonus is not activated, after the bonus game is finished, and when the setting is changed. The transition to the highly-probable lottery state means that a bonus production stock (stock Y) that can be shifted to after the bonus is over as compared to the lottery state of the peripheral control board 510 in the low-probability gaming state over a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). ) And the like.

  Specifically, when the bonus is not activated, when the chance small role 1 (delicacy symbol) is won out of the above-mentioned chance small roles, it shifts to the high-precision lottery state at 23/1000, whereas the chance small If the winning combination 2 (drawstring pattern) is won, the game moves to the high probability lottery state at 975/1000. In other words, it is easier to shift to the high-precision lottery state when winning the chance small role 2 (drawstring symbol) than when winning the chance small role 1 (delicacy symbol).

  In the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the lottery state on the peripheral control board 510 is the high-precision lottery state, the high-precision lottery state transition is surely made for several games (for example, 10 games) from the first game after the bonus game ends. (1000/1000). Further, after the setting is changed (also referred to as an initial state), the lottery state transition lottery is performed regardless of whether or not the lottery state is the high probability lottery state, and the lottery state is shifted to the high probability lottery state at 750/1000. The number of games in which the high-precision lottery state is set differs depending on whether the lottery state of the peripheral control board 510 at the time of winning the bonus is the low-precision lottery state or the high-precision lottery state. Although not specifically illustrated, when the lottery state of the peripheral control board 510 at the time of winning the bonus is the low-precision lottery state, the number of games in the high-precision lottery state to be transferred after the bonus ends is 10 or more games. The probability is higher than the probability of 30 games or more. On the other hand, when the gaming state of the peripheral control board 510 at the time of winning the bonus is the high-precision lottery state, the probability that the number of games in the high-precision lottery state to be transferred after the bonus ends will be 30 games or more is 10%. It is higher than the probability of being more than a game.

  The transition to the super chance mode is different depending on the selected chance small role (chance small role 1 (delicacy symbol) or chance small role 2 (drawstring symbol)) and the lottery state (high It depends on the accuracy or low accuracy). As already described about the super chance mode, it is easier to shift to the super chance state when winning the chance small role 2 (drawstring symbol) than when winning the chance small role 1 (delicacy symbol). Is due to the difference in the lottery probabilities shown below. When the chance small role 1 (delicacy symbol) is won, regardless of whether the gaming state is a high probability lottery state or a low probability lottery state, a transition to the super chance mode is made at 10/1000. On the other hand, when the chance small role 2 (drawstring pattern) is won, the chance is 188/1000 when the lottery is in the low probability lottery state, and 562/1000 when the lottery is in the high probability lottery state. Transition to mode. As described above, compared to the case where the chance small role 2 (drawstring symbol) is won, the case where the chance small role 1 (delicacy symbol) is won regardless of the lottery state of the peripheral control board 510, the super chance mode Easy to transition to.

  In other words, when the chance small role 1 (Tokutoshi) is won, the probability of shifting to the high-precision lottery state is about 3%, the probability of shifting to the super chance state is about 10%, and the probability of winning the bonus is 10%. % To 15%, when winning chance chance 2 (drawstring), 97% is likely to enter the high-precision lottery state, and 20% to 60% is likely to enter the super-chance state (low) (Probability in the sure lottery state to probability in the highly-probable lottery state), the probability of winning the bonus is 5% to 7%. The relationship between these probabilities and the appearance probabilities of chance small part 1 (delicacy) and chance small part 2 (drawstring) is as follows.

  In other words, chance small role 1 (delicacy) with a high appearance probability (selection probability) has a lower probability of shifting to the high-precision lottery state or super-chance state than chance chance role 2 (drawstring), but has won the bonus. Probability is more than twice that of chance pocket 2 (drawstring). In contrast, Chance 2 (Tokutoshi), which has a low appearance probability (selection probability), has a higher probability of shifting to the high-precision lottery or super-chance state than Chance 1 (Tokutoshi). The probability of winning is lower than Chance 1 (Tokutoshi).

  Further, the lottery probability of the bonus production stock (stock Y) is also different depending on whether the lottery state is the high-precision lottery state or the low-probability lottery state. The additional lottery is mainly performed when a bonus is won. Specifically, when the lottery state is in the low probability lottery state, if a bonus is won in the internal lottery on the main control board 409, the stock of Super Kim TIME (a bonus effect that continues until the next bonus) is added at 4/1000. , The stock of Mr. Kimi TIME (special effect that continues up to the number of times a small role is established) is added at 40/1000, while the lottery state is a high-precision lottery state by internal lottery on the main control board 409 If you win a bonus, you will receive a stock of Super Kim's TIME (special effect that lasts until the next bonus) on 8/1000, and a special effect that will limit the number of small roles that can be established on 992/1000 (Kim's TIME) Add the stock. In other words, when the lottery state is the high-definition lottery state, if the bonus is won, the game shifts almost to Kimi TIME after the bonus ends.

  Furthermore, when the lottery state is the high-precision lottery state, compared to the low-probability lottery state, the stock of Super Kim-san (private production that continues until the next bonus) and Kim-san TIME (limited number of small roles established) Continuing bonus production) stocks are likely to be stocked (it is also easy to win the bonus production stock addition lottery). In the following, the stock of Super Kim TIME (special effect that continues until the next bonus) can be described as “Stock Y1”, and the stock of Kim TIME (special effect that continues until the number of small roles is established) can be described as “Stock Y2.” When including two stocks, describe as “Stock Y”.

  In the bonus production stock addition lottery according to the present embodiment, a lottery for Super Kim TIME (Stock Y1) is first performed, and only when Stock Y1 is not stocked (lost in the lottery for Stock Y1). A lottery for Mr. TIME (Stock Y2). That is, the random number of 1 obtained by the stock addition lottery for the bonus effect is first used for the lottery for the stock Y1, and is used for the lottery for the stock Y2 only when the lottery for the stock Y1 is lost. In other words, when the lottery concerning the stock Y1 is won (it is decided to shift to Super Kim TIME), the lottery for the stock Y2 is not performed.

  In this way, if the player wins the stock Y1, the player can surely win the Super Kim TIME, and even if the player does not win the stock Y1, the player will be selected for the stock Y2. Therefore, the player can always play a game while expecting to win the stock Y1.

  The bonus effect stock addition lottery is performed not only when the bonus is established but also during a bonus game (also referred to as a bonus operation). Whether or not the lottery has been performed can be confirmed by the player by displaying a losing eye in the symbol display area 5901b of the effect display device 590 during the bonus game (unauthorized for the internal lottery). In other words, the bonus effect stock addition lottery is performed only when the internal lottery on the main control board 409 is lost during the bonus game. Here, in the bonus production stock addition lottery, the stock addition lottery of Super Kim's TIME (private production that continues until the next bonus) is 4/1000, and Kim's TIME (privacy production that continues up to the number of small roles established) The stock addition lottery is 132/1000.

  In addition, the bonus production stock addition lottery may be performed during Super Kim's TIME (privilege production that continues until the next bonus) or during Kim's TIME (bonus production that continues until the number of small roles is established). In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery on the main control board 409 is lost while the bonus production is continued, the bonus production stock addition lottery is performed, and 4/1000, Mr. Kim TIME Win the stock addition lottery). Here, when a bonus is won during Super Kim's TIME, there is a higher probability of winning a bonus effect stock addition lottery than winning a bonus during a normal game. As described above, when a bonus is won during the bonus production, a bonus and bonus production loop can be expected by making the gaming machine easy to perform the bonus production.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a bonus game is executed by winning a predetermined winning combination in an internal lottery after winning a bonus and paying out a game medium as a prize. The bonus game ends when the game media reaches a predetermined number. Here, if too many game media are paid out per unit time in the bonus game, the player will be unilaterally disadvantaged, rather than scolding the player. Therefore, in order to suppress the number of payouts per unit time, it is possible to dare to lose the role in the internal lottery performed during the bonus game. Although details of the display mode of the symbol display area 5901b in this case have already been described, by displaying the losing symbol, the player can recognize that the result of the internal lottery has been losing.

  The problem here is that the game that can be obtained as a result of the bonus game for the player, even if the losing of the bonus game during the bonus game has led to suppressing the disadvantage for the hole The net increase in the number of media is reduced. Simply, the fact that the result of the internal lottery is losing is disappointing to the player, but under the circumstances described above, if the player frequently loses during the bonus game, Rather than being discouraged, there may be times when you will be forced to feel angry, which may lead to a decline in interest.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the bonus effect lottery is performed only when the result of the internal lottery during the bonus game is a loss. In this bonus production lottery, a bonus lottery is performed to determine whether or not the bonus production is to be performed after the bonus game ends. If the internal lottery during the bonus game is lost, a bonus addition stock lottery is performed. In this way, the more frequent losers occur in the internal lottery during the bonus game, the more chances are given for the bonus production, as well as the case where the bonus production has already been won. It can be expected that the bonus production stock may be added by the bonus production stock addition lottery as the lottery in the lottery occurs more frequently.

  By the way, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the internal lottery during execution of the bonus game, a winning combination (small items, etc.) is mainly selected. In this way, by losing the internal lottery performed during the bonus game, game media paid out per unit time can be suppressed, and not only can the disadvantage of the hole be suppressed, but also the player It is possible to suppress the gambling feeling.

(Boarding and release of bonus production stock)
Stock added by the bonus production stock addition lottery in this embodiment (Super Kim's TIME (private production that continues until the next bonus) stock (stock Y1) and Kim's TIME (privilege that continues up to the number of small roles established) Production) stock (stock Y2)) is carried over to the next bonus production game when not all stock has been consumed in the bonus production game started after the end of the latest bonus. Regarding a specific example in which the bonus production stock is carried over, when the bonus is won, the bonus production lottery is won (for example, it is decided to continue to Kimi TIME), and the bonus production stock addition lottery is won (for example, The case where 1 is added to the stock Y2 will be described.

  As described above, it is decided to shift to Kimi TIME by the bonus production lottery, the bonus production stock addition lottery is performed, and the bonus production stock (Kimsan TIME (the bonus production that continues up to the number of small roles established) is limited). When the stock (stock Y2)) is won, it is in a state of having one privilege effect stock (stock Y2). Since the stock determined in the bonus effect stock addition lottery is the stock Y2, after the bonus game ends, the bonus effect (Kim TIME) that continues up to the number of times the small role is established is started. Next, a predetermined number of small roles are determined by the lottery for lottery navigation, and navigation for winning a small role is performed up to the predetermined number of small roles. For example, in the case where the number of small roles is selected as 5 by the Navi small role number lottery, the winning for the small role is navigated until five small roles are won during the replay time. Further, the navigation is performed so as to avoid winning the punk role (replay 0) of the replay time, which is the trigger for the end of the bonus effect game, until the navigation for winning the winning combination ends.

  The bonus puncture in this embodiment has already been described. For example, even in this example, if the reel stop operation is performed without following the navigation about the punk role of the replay time, Even in a state where only one of the five small roles has been digested, the bonus effect ends with the winning of the punk role (replay 0) at the replay time. In other words, the bonus presentation ends without acquiring the remaining four small roles.

  However, even in such a case, after the bonus directing game ends, when the bonus directing game starts again (that is, a bonus is won in the normal game after the replay puncture, etc., and the bonus directing lottery is also won). Prior to digesting the number of small roles determined by the Navi small role lottery in the bonus effect game (which may be later) A privilege effect game can be started from a small role that could not be played (four in the above example). That is, even if the small role that was scheduled to be navigated by winning the punk role at the replay time during the privilege production game is missed, the small role navigation can be carried over to the next privilege production.

  In addition, when a bonus is won in a normal game after replay puncture, even if it is not won in a bonus production lottery at the time of the bonus, etc., the remaining that could not be obtained in the previous bonus production Since the player already has the right to acquire four small roles (the value of the stock Y2 is not 0), the bonus presentation can be started unconditionally after the bonus ends. In this way, the bonus effect after the bonus ends is the odd number of small roles different from the number selected by the original Navi small role number lottery (that is, the remaining 4 that could not be acquired in the previous bonus effect). It will start from a small part).

  Then, even if the player fails to acquire a small role that could have been originally acquired by mistakenly winning a punk role at the replay time in the previous bonus production, Since there is a merit that the player can always acquire the bonus after the next bonus, the player has a desire to continue playing until the next bonus. As the utilization rate is expected to increase, this is also beneficial for the hall.

  The above describes the player's remedy effect.For example, if the player accidentally wins a replay time punk role in the bonus production, the game is played until the next bonus. Describe the case of not continuing. If a player who sits next to the above player wins a bonus by playing a game, even if he / she does not win the bonus production lottery, the player who sat last time cannot win In other words, a peony-like situation can be considered from the shelf, where the remaining 4 small roles can be obtained unconditionally.

  Moreover, although the above described concretely about the case where the privilege production was ended without acquiring the predetermined small part in the privilege production, the value of the privilege production stock (for example, stock Y2) is 6, for example. Even in the case (when the score effect stock has been added by winning the bonus effect stock addition lottery), the concept of carrying over the stock is the same. For example, it is determined that a bonus effect will be performed after the bonus ends by winning a bonus effect lottery performed when a bonus is won, etc. (at least 1 is added to the stock Y2), and bonus effect stock addition When the value of stock Y2 finally becomes 6 by winning the lottery (it is decided that 6 sets of bonus effects will be performed after the bonus at this point), bonus effects will be started 1 is subtracted from the value of the stock Y2, and becomes 5.

  Then, in the bonus production, when the number of small roles is selected as 5 by the Navi small role lottery, and after winning a small role for one, the punk role of replay time is won. If the bonus game is terminated with 4 small roles that should have been originally acquired, in addition to the odd number of 4 small roles, the bonus production set is 5 times. I couldn't even get. In such a case, assuming that these can be acquired in the next bonus winning, the value of remedying the player will increase significantly, and we do not know that such gaming benefits remain. In addition, the player who can obtain these special effects can be given a great feeling.

  Here, the impression received by the player varies depending on the timing and mode of releasing these special effects. For example, in the bonus production lottery or bonus production stock addition lottery performed at the time of winning a bonus, etc., the stock Y2 is already 1 or more, and the bonus production obtained in a peony manner from the shelf is started prior to the bonus production. In such a case, the number of odd small roles is displayed in the Navi small role number display area 5904, so that the player can clearly recognize that he has obtained a bonus effect from the shelf. Can do.

  On the other hand, if the bonus production that was acquired from the shelf is started after the stock obtained by the stock addition lottery etc. is released first, the bonus presentation will be performed from the shelf. The fact that it can be recognized at a glance is the same as in the case of the first, but the number of odd small roles is also displayed in the navigation small role number display area 5904, so that Since it is understood that the continuation is going to the end stage, if possible, I would like to win the bonus effect stock addition lottery again during execution of the bonus effect (a predetermined value is added to the value of stock Y1 or stock Y2) It is possible to digest the bonus production while wishing.

  However, if the bonus presentation that was acquired from the shelf in a peony-like manner is always performed later than the bonus presentation that you obtained, you can end the bonus presentation while leaving the small role during the bonus presentation. As the number of bonus combinations is increased, the bonus production set with the odd number of small roles remaining is added from one to the next. In this case, each time a bonus game in which the number of small roles displayed in the Navi small role number display area 5904 is odd is started, this is a bonus effect that can be acquired peonyally from the shelf. In addition to being able to easily understand that it is a certain privilege effect, it is possible to grasp how many times the privilege effect was unwillingly ended.

  In the above example, when the game is played without winning the puncture of the replay time, all the bonus production stock (stock Y1 or stock Y2) is released (that is, the value of stock Y1 or stock Y2 is 0) The bonus effect ends, and the image displayed in the effect display area 5901a of the effect display device 590 returns to the normal game image (see (f) of FIG. 77). However, even in this case, it has already been described that the replay time continues until winning the replay time punk role.

  As another example, when the bonus production is being executed and the value of the bonus production stock (stock Y1 or stock Y2) is 1 or more (that is, the bonus production is determined to continue). In the case of winning a bonus, please describe. In this case, as in the case where the punk role of replay time is won by mistake, the special effect set and the special effect set already possessed when winning the punk role of replay time The small role that should have been won will be released after the bonus ends.

  Whether the bonus production that started after the bonus game ended is the one that you have assigned in the course of your game or that you have acquired from the shelf in a peony-like manner, or near the end of the bonus production In this case, the player can only operate by displaying the number of odd small roles in the navigation small number display area 5904. In other words, during the bonus production, the bonus play is ended (unintentionally) by winning the punk role of the replay time without acquiring any of the small roles displayed in the navigation small role number display area 5904. In the case where the bonus effect has been made, the bonus effect is released after the end of the next bonus without subtracting the number of small roles, so that the player cannot feel that the bonus effect is started.

  Therefore, when the bonus presentation is terminated without acquiring any of the bonus plays displayed in the navigation small role display area 5904 in the bonus presentation, the number of bonus plays is decremented by one. You may make it discharge | release as privilege production after the next bonus above. Then, when the bonus production is started, the number of small roles displayed in the navigation small role display area 5904 is the number of odd small roles that are not displayed in the original bonus production. Since the player is displayed, whether the bonus presentation is the bonus presentation that was left when he or she unintentionally ended the bonus presentation, or the person sitting in front of it unwillingly ended It is possible to clearly discriminate whether or not it has been allowed.

  In general, when a small role that should have been acquired is subtracted by 1, the player may feel angry, but avoidance of a punk role in the replay time in this embodiment follows navigation. It is very easy, and it is thought that the winning of the punk role is often due to a player's operation mistake. Under such circumstances, by applying the above-mentioned penalty sanctions, maintain fairness between those who could avoid winning the replay time punk and those who did not It is also possible.

  This embodiment is equipped with a ceiling function. Specifically, a flag is established when a game exceeding 1079 games is played at the end of the bonus (referred to as a ceiling flag), a lottery to enter a high-precision lottery state and a high-precision game addition lottery are performed, and the main control board Until the bonus is won in the internal lottery at 409, only the formation of the small role is navigated (referred to as “infinite AT navigation”). The navigation may be performed by voice or lamp, or may be navigated to the player by displaying liquid crystal (the effect display area 5901a and the symbol display area 5901b in the effect display device 590).

  Here, if the game state is Kimi TIME (a bonus effect that continues up to the number of times a small role is established) when the 1079 game is reached, the ceiling flag is established when the 1079 game is exceeded. However, the game proceeds while the ceiling flag is established until the bonus effect ends, and the infinite AT navigation is activated after the bonus effect ends. The infinite AT navigation after the end of the bonus production is also for navigating only the establishment of the small role by voice or the like as described above.

  If the game state is Super Kim TIME (special effect that continues until the next bonus) when the 1079 game is reached, the ceiling flag is established when the 1079 game is exceeded. As in the case of Mr. Kim TIME, the bonus production ends when the bonus production is completed or the bonus production ends in an unintentional manner (the replay time punk role is won. If it is). Here, when the bonus is established, the established ceiling flag is reset. However, when Super Kim-san TIME is terminated in an unwilling manner, the infinite AT is activated from the time of termination.

[Special production]
In the slot machine according to the present invention, for example, in a game executed after being left unattended for a predetermined time (predetermined predetermined time) without being played for a while, a bonus or the like is not won as a result of an internal lottery. Even in such a case, a hot effect (special effect) is performed for the player as if the bonus was won. In particular, slot machines, for example, have different bonus winning probabilities for each setting set by the hall personnel, so games continue to be played on gaming machines that seem to have a good appearance rate. On the other hand, there is a tendency that a gaming machine that seems to have a low turnout rate is left without being played.

  In other words, for gaming machines that are likely to appear frequently, the player tends to judge that “this gaming machine is good to set”, while for gaming machines that do not appear frequently, This game machine has a tendency to be judged as “setting is bad”. Therefore, when a game is played on a gaming machine that has been left for more than the predetermined time as in the slot machine of the present embodiment, there is an expectation that an advantageous result will be brought to the player. By performing the effects that can be given, it is possible to make the player who started the game with the abandoned gaming machine hesitate to stop the game halfway.

  Specific control will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, whether or not the gaming machine has been left for more than the predetermined time is counted by a dedicated timer that counts the elapsed time since the previous game ended. Here, the end of the “previous game” is to stop the one reel that is stopped last among all the reels after all the reels are rotated by the start of the previous game. The operation is terminated when the operated stop button is released. However, when a medal as a prize is paid out as a result of one game, the game may be ended when the medal as a prize is paid out.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a dedicated timer is used to measure whether or not the gaming machine is left unattended for a predetermined time. Instead, it is assigned to one game. You may use the timer which time-measured time. The “time allotted to one game” is a time (for example, an allocation time of 4.1 sec) that is determined to prevent a medal as a game medium from being consumed by a student, and this allocation time elapses. The next game will not be executed before.

[Timer count processing]
The timer count process will be described with reference to FIG. The timer count process is controlled by the main control board 409. Here, the timer count process is not started when the power is turned on. Assuming that the timer starts when the power is turned on, in a general pachinko hall, the power is turned on before opening the hall, so when the player starts the game, the predetermined time in the timer count process is already This is because, in such a case, when a game is played in the morning (immediately after opening), a special effect can almost always be performed. Then, not only will the rare feeling and appreciation for the occurrence of special effects (details will be described later) fade, but it will give the player the recognition that the special effects are always gusset effects, which will only be annoying effects. In addition, there is a risk that the production performed when the internal lottery is a win will be annoying.

  Therefore, the timer count process is started on the condition that at least one game is executed after the power is turned on. For example, when a game medal is inserted (including when the bet buttons 205 and 206 are operated), the timer counting process is started when the start lever 210 is operated or when the third stop button is operated. The

  If the condition that “at least one game is being executed” is cleared, it is next determined whether or not the game condition is not established (step S1100). Here, the game condition is not satisfied means that the game cannot be started (the reel does not rotate even if the start lever 210 is operated). For example, all the reels are stopped and a predetermined number of games are played. A state where no medal is inserted is mentioned. If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the next game can be executed without inserting a prescribed number of game medals, so the game condition is not satisfied.

  “The state in which a prescribed number of game medals have not been inserted” means that, for example, in a slot machine in which a game can be executed only after three medals are inserted, only one or two game medals are inserted. In a slot machine in which a game can be executed if at least one game medal is inserted, this corresponds to a state in which no game medal is inserted.

  Here, for example, if a game medal as an execution condition for the next game has not been inserted even though one game has ended, the game medal is to be executed unless the previous game result is a replay. It can be said that “game conditions are not satisfied” until is inserted. In other words, unless the previous game result is a replay, a situation may occur in which the game condition is not satisfied after each game. In addition, as a situation where the gaming conditions may not be established for a long time, for example, there is no game medal (or credit data) provided for the game, and the player leaves the stand (game machine) to stop the game. Can be considered. If it is determined that the gaming condition is not satisfied (YES in step S1100), the timer is started (step S1120), and then the process proceeds to the timer effect determination process (FIG. 81). Note that although the credit data remains, the gaming state is not established even when the player leaves the platform for a certain period of time in order to take a rest or meal break.

[Timer effect determination processing]
The timer effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. This process is controlled by the main control board 409. This process is performed when the previous game result is not replay and after the previous game that has not been replayed ends (after the timer is started), after the predetermined time has elapsed (that is, It is assumed that the game is resumed after waiting for a predetermined time. In this state, when the player who played the previous game starts the game again (for example, when the game is resumed after returning from a toilet break or a meal break), the previous game is played. When a player who is different from the player who played the game newly plays a game (for example, after the player who played the previous game leaves the table because the credit data becomes 0, another player And the case where the game is restarted on the stand). The present invention will be described particularly in the latter case where a player who is different from the player who played the previous game has newly played the game.

  The timer effect determination process is based on the premise that the game can be resumed. That is, the reel can be rotated by operating the start lever 210 again after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the previous game, and then a game medal is inserted (or the MAX bet button is operated). It is necessary to be in a state to become. When the game is resumed, whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the previous game (timer start) when the game result is not a replay until the next game is started (whether the timer has elapsed a predetermined time) Is determined (step S1200). If it is determined that the timer has counted the lapse of a predetermined time (YES in step S1200), a timer effect flag is established (step S1220), and the timer is reset (step S1240).

[Command reception processing]
Next, command reception processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the command reception process, the peripheral control board 510 receives information transmitted from the main control board 409 (for example, winning information, timer count information, information on whether or not to perform effects, information on timer effect flags, etc.). Then, based on the received information, the process continues to the effect process. Specifically, when an effect development command (information on whether or not to produce an effect or the like) is received from main control board 409 (YES in step S2100), the process proceeds to an N value determination process (step S2120). The N value determination process is a process of drawing lots after how many games the effect is performed. The N value is determined based on the N value determination table in FIG. After the N value is determined by the N value determination process, the process proceeds to the effect process (step S2140). In addition to the information on whether or not to perform an effect, the effect development command includes information on whether or not the timer effect flag obtained in the timer effect determination process described above is established.

[N value determination table]
Here, the N value determination table will be described with reference to FIG. In the N value determination table, the table is divided into 0, 1-5, 6-10, 11-15, 16-20, 21-25. In the N value determination process, the N value is determined by determining one of these divided sections at a predetermined selection rate. For example, the selection rate of the category “0” is 0.3, and each category of “1-5”, “6-10”, “11-15”, “16-20”, and “21-25” The selectivity for selecting is 0.14. Then, after selecting one of these categories, the N value is determined with an equal probability. For example, when the category “1-5” is selected, then any one of 1-5 is determined as an N value with an equal probability of 1/5 each. Here, the N value indicates how many games the special effect is to be performed after the effect flag in step S1220 is established. For example, if the N value is “2”, two games after the current game. Special effects are performed. If the N value is “0”, the special effect is not performed.

  In this way, by changing the selection rate of the N value, when the special performance is performed at the first game after a predetermined time, or when the special game is not performed at the 25th game. (N value = 0) and the like exist, and variations on the start (presence / absence) of special effects are widened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily seeing that the bonus is not won when the special performance is performed. For example, if a game is started on a gaming machine that has been left for a predetermined time, a special effect is performed in the first game after the game is started. Then, there is a risk that the player will perceive the mechanism of the gaming machine. If the mechanism of the gaming machine is overlooked by the player, the game itself may become ruined even if a special effect is made, which may give the player the impression that it is an annoying effect.

  However, as in the present invention, if the timing of special effects is different each time, even if it is a skilled player, whether special effects were performed, or whether a bonus (or chance chance) was won by internal lottery Therefore, it is difficult to guess the occurrence of special effects.

[Direction processing]
The effect process will be described with reference to FIG. In the effect process, first, the peripheral control board 510 determines whether or not the winning information received from the main control board 409 is related to the bonus winning (step S2200). If it is determined that the bonus is won (YES in step S2200), an effect (bonus table) to be performed when the bonus is won is selected and a bonus effect is performed (step S2220). If the bonus has not been won (NO in step S2200), whether or not a chance that can give the player a sense of expectation that the bonus has been won is displayed although the bonus has not been won as a result of the internal lottery ( It is determined whether or not a chance item is won (step S2240). If it is determined that the chance is won (YES in step S2240), an effect (chance eye table) to be performed when the chance is won is selected, and the chance eye is performed (step S2260).

  If the chance is not won (NO in step S2240), it is determined whether or not the N value is 1 (N = 1?) (Step S2280). If the N value is 1 (YES in step S2280), it is determined whether or not the timer effect flag is 1 (step S2300). The timer effect flag is a flag that is established based on the fact that the timer has elapsed for a predetermined time in step S1220 of the timer effect determination process in FIG. 81 (all reels are stopped and a specified number of game medals are inserted. Flag that is established based on the fact that a predetermined time has passed. If it is determined that the timer effect flag is 1 (YES in step S2300), the gasse bonus table is selected (step S2320), and the bonus as in the case where the bonus table is selected as the special effect is selected. (A very similar effect similar to the bonus effect performed). When this Gasse Bonus Table is selected, the internal lottery for when the game is being played continuously (that is, when the game is being played without waiting for the game to run for a predetermined time) The special effect is performed with a higher probability than the probability that the special effect is performed when the result is lost. In this embodiment, the bonus effect and the gase bonus effect are stored in the ROM as different effect data, but the same effect data may be shared. After the gasse bonus effect is performed, the N value is reset (step S2340). If it is determined that the timer effect flag is not 1 (NO in step S2300), error processing is performed (step S2360).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2280 that the N value is not 1 (NO in step S2280), 1 is subtracted from the N value (N = N-1) (step S2380). For example, when the N value is “5”, N = 1 is not satisfied, so that the N value is decremented by 1 in step S2380 (5-1 = 4), and the effect process ends. This process is performed each time the game is repeated until it is determined in step S2280 that the N value has become 1.

  Even if the N value in this game is “1” and the timer performance flag is established, when the bonus is won as a result of the internal lottery, the bonus table is selected without selecting the gasse bonus table. Is done.

  The flow of special effects is as follows. First, a player starts a game with the slot machine of the present invention. Depending on the setting of the stand, it may be difficult to win a bonus, and the normal game may become monotonous. As a result, the player stops the game in the gaming machine and moves to another table or leaves the hall. In this case, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the player left the table, it is highly likely that the player restarts the game on the table, not the player who has left the table, but another player.

  A special effect can be performed when another player starts a game on the table after a certain time has elapsed since the player left the table. The player who witnessed the special performance wondered, "This performance is a hot performance," and was immediately driven by an arbitrary delusion that "This table may have a high setting." Can be expected not to leave the platform. In this way, a player who plays a game for the first time on the gaming machine can be motivated to continue playing the game. If the player's willingness to play the game is stimulated in this way, the operating rate of the gaming machine is expected to increase, so the number of abandoned tables is reduced, and it can be said that there is a merit on the hall side.

  Since the present invention assumes that the subject that resumes the game after a certain period of time is mainly a player other than the player who stopped the game, the special effects in the present invention are as follows It is preferable that the effect is easy to understand even for a player who is playing a game for the first time with respect to the gaming machine, such as “continuous effect that makes you think it may have been”. Because, even if it is a hot production, if the production is difficult to determine unless it is a player who has played a game for a long time, whether or not the production is hot is determined for the game machine for the first time. This is because it is difficult for the player who performs the game to discriminate, and the purpose of providing the special effect is lost.

  In this embodiment, if it is determined that the timer effect flag is 1 (YES in step S2300), a very similar effect is performed that is very similar to the bonus effect. Instead, for example, RTAT or ART is used. There may be an effect that expects that a state advantageous to the player may occur.

  By the way, the following technical idea can be grasped from the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above. The following technical ideas are provided alone or in appropriate combination. In addition, since the following technical ideas express the present embodiment as the technical idea, the terms described in the present embodiment are expressed in terms of higher-level concepts, and books corresponding to the higher-level conceptual terms. Terms used in the embodiments are described in parentheses.

[Technology 1]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 is
A symbol display means for arranging a plurality of symbol rows each having a symbol attached thereto;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined internal lottery for each game;
A symbol display control means for controlling the display of the plurality of symbol strings in a variable state so that a specific symbol combination indicating that the internal lottery is won is displayed based on winning the internal lottery;
Advantageous game execution means for executing an advantageous game in which a large amount of game media can be given to the player when the specific symbol combination is displayed based on winning the internal lottery,
Effect display means for displaying a predetermined effect;
An effect lottery process is performed in which the effect displayed on the effect display means is determined from any of a plurality of effect modes including a gorgeous effect that can give an expectation that the advantageous game is executed,
When the internal lottery is won, the winning lottery means for performing the winning lottery process so as to be determined with a predetermined probability as the luxury stage, and when the internal lottery is not won, the luxury stage or the luxury stage The gorgeous effect or the similar effect only when the gorgeous effect or the similar effect is determined with a very low probability lower than the predetermined probability so that it is difficult to be determined to be a similar effect that is very similar to the effect. Production lottery means having a lottery effect lottery means for performing a lottery production lottery as determined by
Effect display control for controlling the gorgeous effect or the similar effect to be displayed on the effect display means based on the decision to display the gorgeous effect or the similar effect on the effect display means. Means,
An expectation improvement means capable of increasing the frequency at which the gorgeous effect or the very similar effect is displayed based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied despite the fact that the internal lottery was not won, To do.

  This gaming machine is provided with a symbol display means (reel 301a, reel 301b, reel 301c) in which a plurality of symbol rows each having a symbol are arranged, and a predetermined number for each game. A lottery means for performing the internal lottery (internal lottery process executed in S3 by the main control board 409) and a specific symbol combination indicating that the internal lottery is won based on the fact that the internal lottery is won. It is provided with a symbol display control means (a process on the control program executed in S5 and S6 by the main control board 409) for controlling the display of a plurality of symbol strings in a variable state so as to be displayed.

  Here, “every game” means, for example, in this type of gaming machine, one game executed with a predetermined bet number set, and a predetermined number of medals and pachinko balls are inserted. In the slot machine, for example, in a three-slot slot machine, three games are included. There is a game that is played once by inserting a game medium, a game that is played by digesting credit data, and a game that is automatically set with a predetermined bet amount by winning a re-game player. included.

  The gaming machine further has advantageous game execution means (main control board 409) for executing an advantageous game in which a large amount of game media can be given to the player when a specific symbol combination is displayed based on winning of the internal lottery. If the bonus game is a BB game, the process from the start of the BB game in step S322 to the end of the BB game in step S374 is equivalent. If the bonus game is an RB game, a predetermined effect is displayed when the BB game is started in step S332 until the end of the BB game is determined in step 384). As an effect displayed on the effect display means (effect display device 590) and the effect display means, an expectation that an advantageous game is executed can be given. An effect lottery means for performing an effect lottery process to be determined from any of a plurality of effect modes including a flower effect (an effect process which is a process on a program executed by the peripheral control board 510), and the luxury effect is the effect. Effect display control means (peripheral control board 510) for controlling to be displayed on the display means.

  At the time of winning, the effect lottery means (the effect processing which is a process on the program executed by the peripheral control board 510) performs the effect lottery processing at the time of winning so as to be determined as a gorgeous effect with a predetermined probability when winning the internal lottery. If the production lottery means and the internal lottery are not won, the gorgeous production or the gorgeous production with a very low probability lower than the above predetermined probability, so that it is difficult to determine the gorgeous production or the very similar production similar to the gorgeous production. Only when it is determined to be a rendition effect, there is a lost rendition effect lottery means for performing a rendition effect lottery so that the gorgeous rendition or the rendition effect is determined.

  Here, the extremely low probability is a probability set to be a big hit with a high probability of, for example, a quarter to a quarter, for example, when a gorgeous effect is displayed in relation to the predetermined probability. It is. For example, even if the expectation degree of jackpot when an effect with a low expectation degree of jackpot is displayed is about 1/100, the expectation degree of jackpot when a luxury effect is displayed is 1/4 to 1. The predetermined probability and the extremely low probability are set so as to be 1/5. In general, the probability of winning an internal lottery (winning a bonus) is extremely low, for example, about 1/300, and in many games, it is often lost.

  In other words, there are very few opportunities for the player to see the gorgeous performance (the performance performed when the bonus is won internally). Note that the “gorgeous effect or the similar effect” may be selected as the same effect when the result of the internal lottery is a win or when it is a loss. For example, when the result of the internal lottery is a win, the gorgeous effect can be determined, and when the result of the internal lottery is lost, the appearance looks gorgeous, but the gorgeous effect is fine. This is because it is possible to determine a very similar effect.

  The “gorgeous effect that can give a sense of expectation that an advantageous game will be executed” corresponds to, for example, an expected effect that causes a user to expect that a bonus may be won in an internal lottery. Expected effects include, for example, a story-based development effect in which the story develops one after another, an effect in which the equipment installed in the gaming machine operates flashy, or when the bonus is actually won in the internal lottery An effect that does not occur frequently in a normal game (normal game), such as an effect to be performed. In addition, the expected effect may be completed in one game or may be performed over a plurality of games.

  The effect display control means controls the effect determined in the effect lottery process to be displayed on the effect display means. For example, when it is decided to win the internal lottery and perform the luxury effect, Control is performed so that a gorgeous effect is displayed on the effect display means.

  The present invention further includes an expectation improvement means capable of increasing the frequency with which a gorgeous effect or a similar effect is displayed based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied even though the internal lottery is not won. Thereby, it can suppress that a monotonous game continues.

[Technology 2]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1,
The expectation improvement means is
A waiting time measuring means for measuring a waiting time until the next game is executed;
Excess determination means capable of determining whether or not the time counted by the waiting time counting means exceeds a specified time; and
In order to increase the frequency at which the gorgeous effect or the similar effect is displayed based on the fact that the waiting time measured by the waiting time measuring means as the specific condition exceeds the specified time, By having the production probability improving means capable of changing the low probability to a higher probability, the frequency of displaying the gorgeous production or the very similar production is intentionally increased, and the expectation that can be given to the player is enhanced. It is characterized by being able to get.

  In the technical idea 2 described above, even if the result of the internal lottery is lost, based on the fact that the standby time measured by the standby time measuring means exceeds a specified time, which is a specific condition, The frequency at which the performance is displayed is intentionally increased so that the expectation that can be given to the player can be increased.

  Specifically, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is a waiting time measuring means (timer) that measures a waiting time during which a game is not executed (waiting time from the end of the previous game until the next game is executed). ) And an excess determination means (step S1200) that can determine whether or not the measured time exceeds a specified time, and when it is determined that the standby time measured by the excess determination means exceeds the specified time, Production probability improving means (steps S1220 and S2320) capable of changing the extremely low probability to a higher probability in order to increase the frequency at which the gorgeous effect or the very similar effect is displayed. Here, the “high probability” than the extremely low probability is almost the same as or more than the frequency at which the gorgeous effect is displayed when the result of the internal lottery is a win, even though the result of the internal lottery is lost. It is preferable that the probability is almost the same as or higher than the predetermined probability so that a gorgeous effect or a very similar effect can be displayed at a high frequency.

  As a result, when the game is resumed in the gaming machine after the specified time has elapsed without the player playing a game, it is determined that the standby time counted by the excess determination means has exceeded the specified time. In such a case, even if the internal lottery is not won, there is a high possibility that a very similar effect similar to the luxurious effect will be performed. In the present invention, the case where “the game is resumed after the lapse of the specified time without playing the game” is, after a certain player has played the game and stopped the game, It is assumed that another player has started a game with the gaming machine.

  The player who has resumed the game has passed the specified time from the end of the previous game to the restart of the game for the game machine. The game is resumed without knowing that it can be performed ("start" for the player). When you witness a very similar production that is similar to a gorgeous production, you can think that you will have (winning) expectations for the game machine, and improve the motivation of the player to continue the game Is possible.

  By the way, the “specified time” in the present invention refers to the time from the end of the game to the start of the next game, and the “elapse of the specified time” generally refers to the time required for taking a rest room or the like. More than 5 minutes to 10 minutes, the game has been left to the extent that it can be recognized that the game has not been played for a while since the previous game, that is, much longer than the time required per game, for example, 30 minutes to 1 It is preferable that more than time has passed. In a so-called abandoned table that has not been played for a while since the previous game, if a rendition or a rendition similar to a rendition is performed when the game is resumed, the player will be motivated to play As a result, it can be said that there is a merit for the hall because it leads to an increase in the operating rate of the abandoned table.

[Technology 3]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2,
One game can be played on condition that a prescribed amount of game media has been inserted,
An electronic storage means capable of storing the game medium as electronic data up to a predetermined number;
The performance probability improving means is such that the waiting time measured by the waiting time counting means exceeds the specified time only when the electronic storage means determines that the specified amount of game media is not stored. The change process with the extremely low probability is performed on the condition that

  The present invention plays a game once on the condition that a game medium is inserted. Examples of the game medium include a game ball in a pachinko game machine and a game medal in a slot machine. It is done. In the present invention, the game medium can be stored as electronic data (electronic storage means). “Reserving game media as electronic data” means, for example, in a pachinko game machine, a game medium (game ball) is immediately supplied by operating a lending button without inserting a predetermined banknote again. In the slot machine, it is possible to operate the operation lever only by operating the MAX bet button (in other words, the credit remains in the slot machine). State).

  Here, “predetermined number of game media is not stored” generally means that the game cannot be started unless a new game media is inserted because the credit is 0. In addition, for example, in a slot machine that can play one game with three cards, if two or less credits remain, that is, even if there are remaining credits, additional game media must be inserted. For example, a state where one game cannot be started is included.

  Thus, by providing the electronic storage means, based on the remaining amount of stored electronic data and the standby time, the player who started the game with the gaming machine can It is possible to determine whether the player is the same player or a different player from the previous player. For example, when a game is started after the game has been on standby for more than a specified time in a state where a predetermined amount of game media necessary for executing one game remains as credit data, the game before entering the standby state It is determined that the game has been resumed by the same player as the player.

  On the other hand, when the game is started after the game has been on standby for more than the specified time with no specified amount of game media necessary for executing one game remaining as credit data, It is determined that the game has been started by a new player other than the player. Here, “a prescribed amount of game media required to execute one game” is, for example, three when the game media is a medal and the number of medals required to execute one game is three. Corresponds.

  The present invention recognizes that “the game has ended” by the end of the previous game, and starts timing by the waiting time measuring means. When it is determined by the electronic storage means that a predetermined number of game media are not stored as described above, and the game is resumed in a state where the standby time counted by the standby time counting means exceeds the specified time Can recognize that “the game has been resumed by a player different from the previous player”.

  In other words, this does not stop the game by the player, but once the game is interrupted by a break, etc., even if the specified time has elapsed, if the credit remains, the game is resumed. Is regarded as the same player as the player who interrupted the game, and can be controlled so that a gorgeous effect or a similar effect is not frequently performed. Regarding whether or not the player has changed between the end of the game and the restart of the game, a sensor such as fingerprint authentication can be provided at a place where the player can touch, such as an operation button or an operation lever, or the face can be authenticated. Although it is conceivable to install a camera that can be used in each gaming machine, it is not preferable because it increases the cost.

  In that respect, in the present invention, the player's time is determined by measuring that the specified time has elapsed from the end of the game (waiting time measuring means, excess determination means) and sensing the presence or absence of credit (electronic storage means). Since the change is judged, it is not necessary to impose the cost burden for installing the sensor and the camera.

[Technology 4]
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3,
The gorgeous production or the production similar to the gorgeous production has a plurality of production patterns.
When performing a gorgeous effect or a very similar effect similar to the gorgeous effect, one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns.

  In the present invention, “a gorgeous effect or a very similar effect similar to a gorgeous effect” corresponds to, for example, an expected effect that can be expected to win a bonus in an internal lottery. And having a plurality of patterns. Then, by selecting one effect pattern from the plurality of patterns, it is possible to perform an extremely similar effect that resembles a different luxurious effect each time.

  The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, such as a pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine. Also, various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 50 Game unit 80 Connector 100 Outer main body 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 103 Top plate 104 Back plate 105 Partition plate 106 Projection step part 107 Attachment piece 108 Attachment piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharge device 111 Medal auxiliary storage box 113 Wiring relay Member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wirings 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Main relay board 123 Peripheral relay board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 128 Support cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal Plate 132 Through-hole 133 Vent hole 134a Through-hole 200 Door-shaped front member 201 Medal tray 202 Operation part 203 Slot 205 Bet button 206 Bet button 207 Medal selector 208 Medal return button 209 Release button 210 start lever 211 reel stop button 212 medal 樋 213 return 樋 214 see-through window 215 lock device 216 forehead frame 217 light emitting unit 219 recessed groove 220 door opening detection switch 221 bass speaker 230 design board 300 design variation display device 301a reel 301b Reel 301c Reel 302 Device case 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate 306 Right plate 307 Left plate 308 Rear plate 309 Cover body 310 Frame portion 311 Partition portion 312 Mounting hole 314 Substrate case 315 Reel main relay substrate 318 Backlight relay substrate 320 Motor mounting Plate 321 Reel motor 321a Left reel motor 321b Middle reel motor 321c Right reel motor 322 Backlight 330 Side member 330a Through hole 330b Circular housing portion 330c Anti-rotation projection 33 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Light-shielding piece 333 Slit 351a Reel band 351b Reel band 351c Reel band 400 Case member 401 Opening part 402 Reinforcement bar 403 Bottom plate 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through-hole 431 Mounting piece 432 Button-shaped panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Nail piece 436 Finger hooking portion 441 Function separation relay terminal plate 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 450 Game state display board 452 Unit side guide portion 453 Main body side guide portion 454 Binding band 455 Band portion 456 Head portion 457 Locking claw 458 Logo display part 460 Unit side through hole 460a Groove part 460b Through hole 461 Main body side through hole 462 Projection part 463 Hole part 464 Hole part forming member 465 Entrance guide part 466 Delivery guide part 467 Guide surface 468 Bank part 469 Ne 469a Free hole 500 Image display body 500b Housing portion 500c Braking member 500s Dashed area 501 Front opening / closing member 502a Illuminating device 502b Reflecting member 508 Receiving portion 509 Engaging portion 510 Peripheral control board 512 Speaker 515 Housing portion 515a Peripheral wall 516 Opening portion 520 Opening Portion 521 Metal plate 522 Metal 523 Front portion 524 Receiving portion 525 Rear portion 526 Through hole 527 Ground wire 528 Type terminal 529 Screw hole 530 Male screw 550 Uneven surface 551 Substrate case unit 552 Substrate case lower portion 553 Substrate case upper portion 554 Small substrate Case 590 Production display device 591 Display panel 591a Opening (symbol display window)
592 Liquid crystal inverter board 593 Fan motor 594 Panel decoration relay board 595 Board 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 605 Lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Lamp 614 Lamp 700 Connector 801c Opening 805 Swing restricting part 820 Extendable arm 850 Main door relay board 851 Connection connector for medal selector 852 Connection connector for stored medal settlement button 853 Connection connector for bet button 854 Connection connector for bet button 855 Connection connector for start lever 856 Connection connector for reel stop button 857 Connection connector for error release switch 858 to main unit connection Connector member 859 to main body connection connector member 860 Door decoration drive board 861 Top decoration board connection connector 862 Upper left decoration board connection connector 863 Lower decoration board connection connector 864 Upper right decoration board connection connector 865 Lower right decoration board connection connector 866 Lower panel illumination lighting board connection connector 867 Speaker connection connector 868 Speaker connection connector 871 Top decoration board 872 Upper left decoration board 873 Lower left Decoration board 874 Upper right decoration board 875 Lower right decoration board 876 Lower panel illumination lighting board 877 Lower panel illumination 900 Door board storage case 901 Door decoration drive board storage part 902 Main door relay board storage part 903 Storage case cover 910 Connector 920 Connector 5901a Production Display area 5901b Symbol display area (liquid crystal reel)
5902a Left image display position 5902b Middle image display position 5902c Right image display position 5903 Movable accessory combination 5904 Navi small role display area

Claims (1)

A symbol display means for arranging a plurality of symbol rows each having a symbol attached thereto;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined internal lottery for each game;
A symbol display control means for controlling the display of the plurality of symbol strings in a variable state so that a specific symbol combination indicating that the internal lottery is won is displayed based on winning the internal lottery;
Advantageous game execution means for executing an advantageous game in which a large amount of game media can be given to the player when the specific symbol combination is displayed based on winning the internal lottery,
Effect display means for displaying a predetermined effect;
An effect lottery process is performed in which the effect displayed on the effect display means is determined from any of a plurality of effect modes including a gorgeous effect that can give an expectation that the advantageous game is executed,
When the internal lottery is won, the winning lottery means for performing the winning lottery process so as to be determined with a predetermined probability as the luxury stage, and when the internal lottery is not won, the luxury stage or the luxury stage The gorgeous effect or the similar effect only when the gorgeous effect or the similar effect is determined with a very low probability lower than the predetermined probability so that it is difficult to be determined to be a similar effect that is very similar to the effect. Production lottery means having a lottery effect lottery means for performing a lottery production lottery as determined by
Effect display control for controlling the gorgeous effect or the similar effect to be displayed on the effect display means based on the decision to display the gorgeous effect or the similar effect on the effect display means. Means,
An expectation improvement means capable of increasing the frequency at which the gorgeous effect or the very similar effect is displayed based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied despite the fact that the internal lottery was not won, To play.